IBM Computer Hardware 61Y User Manual

Hardware Maintenance Manual  
IBM  
xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
IBM  
xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general  
information under “Notices” on page 215.  
First Edition (March 2001)  
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are  
inconsistent with local law:  
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the  
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements  
and/ or changes in the product(s) and/ or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.  
This publication was developed for products and services offered in the United States of America. IBM may not offer the  
products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries, and the information is subject to change  
without notice. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products, services, and features available in  
your area.  
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing  
representative.  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1999. All rights reserved.  
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with  
IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this manual  
This manual contains diagnostic information, a Symptom-to-FRU index, service  
information, error codes, error messages, and configuration information for the IBM®  
xSeries 250, Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y.  
Important: This manual is intended for trained servicers who are familiar with IBM  
PC Server products.  
Important safety information  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing any  
of the instructions.  
Leia todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar qualquer operação.  
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et  
Danger avant de procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.  
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.  
Accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo prima di effettuare  
qualsiasi operazione.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precaución y peligro ante de llevar a cabo  
cualquier operación.  
Online support  
Use the World Wide Web (WWW) to download Diagnostic, BIOS Flash, and Device  
Driver files.  
File download address is:  
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/files.html  
IBM online addresses  
The HMM manuals online address is:  
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/cdt/hmm.html  
The IBM PC Company Support Page is:  
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/support/index.html  
The IBM PC Company Home Page is:  
http://www.pc.ibm.com  
iv Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Contents  
Choices available from the Configuration/ Setup main  
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii  
General checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Installing options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Installing a non-hot-plug PCI adapter (slots 1 and 2). .  
Viewing or changing the parallel-port assignments  
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error codes .  
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical  
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover pair .  
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver  
Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom-to-FRU index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
FRU information (service only). . . . . . . . 107  
Using IBM ServeRAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Configuring controllers using the ServeRAID Manager  
Using FlashMan, the IBM ServeRAID ROM Update  
Using the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program . .  
Parts listing (Type 8665) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Related service information . . . . . . . . . . 179  
vi Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General checkout  
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)  
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major  
components of the server: The system board, Ethernet controller, video controller,  
RAM, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial ports, hard drives,  
and parallel port. You can also use them to test some external devices. See  
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by the  
software, you can run the diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is  
working properly.  
When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause several error  
messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first error message.  
After the cause of the first error message is corrected, the other error messages might  
not occur the next time you run the test.  
A failed system might be part of a shared DASD cluster (two or more systems sharing  
the same external storage device(s)). Prior to running diagnostics, verify that the  
failing system is not part of a shared DASD cluster.  
A system might be part of a cluster if:  
The customer identifies the system as part of a cluster.  
One or more external storage units are attached to the system and at least one of  
the attached storage units is additionally attached to another system or  
unidentifiable source.  
One or more systems are located near the failing system.  
If the failing system is suspected to be part of a shared DASD cluster, all diagnostic  
tests can be run except diagnostic tests which test the storage unit (DASD residing in  
the storage unit) or the storage adapter attached to the storage unit.  
Notes:  
1. For systems that are part of a shared DASD cluster, run one test at a time in  
looped mode. Do not run all tests in looped mode, as this could enable the DASD  
diagnostic tests.  
2. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnose the first error code displayed.  
3. If the computer hangs with a POST error, go to the “Symptom-to-FRU index” on  
4. If the computer hangs and no error is displayed, go to “Undetermined problems”  
5. Power supply problems, see “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.  
6. Safety information, see “Safety information” on page 180.  
7. For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “POST error messages” on  
1. IS THE SYSTEM PART OF A CLUSTER?  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
YES. Schedule maintenance with the customer. Shut down all systems related to the  
cluster. Run storage test.  
NO. Go to step 2.  
2. THE SYSTEM IS NOT PART OF A CLUSTER.  
Power-off the computer and all external devices.  
Check all cables and power cords.  
Set all display controls to the middle position.  
Power-on all external devices.  
Power-on the computer.  
Record any POST error messages displayed on the screen. If an error is  
displayed, look up the first error in the “POST error codes” on page 155.  
Check the information LED panel System Error LED; if on, see “Diagnostic  
Check the System Error Log. If an error was recorded by the system, see  
Start the Diagnostic Programs. See “Diagnostic programs and error  
Check for the following responses:  
a. One beep.  
b. Readable instructions or the Main Menu.  
3. DID YOU RECEIVE BOTH OF THE CORRECT RESPONSES?  
NO. Find the failure symptom in “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.  
YES. Run the Diagnostic Programs. If necessary, refer to “Diagnostic programs and  
If the diagnostics completed successfully and you still suspect a problem, see  
2
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General information  
The IBM xSeries 250 server is a high-performance server with the capability of  
microprocessor upgrade to a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. It is ideally  
suited for networking environments that require superior microprocessor  
performance, efficient memory management, flexibility, and large amounts of reliable  
data storage.  
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key  
considerations during the design of the server. These design features make it possible  
for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today, while providing  
flexible expansion capabilities for the future.  
The xSeries 250 server comes with a three-year limited warranty and 90-Day IBM  
Start Up Support. If you have access to the World Wide Web, you can obtain up-to-  
date information about the server model and other IBM server products at the  
following World Wide Web address: http:/ / www.ibm.com/ eserver/ xseries  
Features and specifications  
The following provides a summary of the features and specifications for the xSeries  
250 server.  
Microprocessor:  
— Intel® Pentium®III Xeon™  
— 32 KB of level-1 cache  
— 1 MB of Level-2 cache (min.)  
— Expandable to four microprocessors  
Memory:  
— Maximum: 16GB  
— Type: ECC, SDRAM, Registered DIMMs  
— Slots: 4-way interleaved, 16 slots  
Drives standard:  
— Diskette: 1.44 MB  
— CD-ROM: IDE  
Expansion bays:  
Hot-swap: 10 slim high  
Non-hot-swap: Two 5.25-inch  
LVD SCSI Backplane:  
— Ultra160 capable  
— Two SCSI channels, each with five connectors, in a split configuration  
— Supports a maximum of 10 slim-high hard disk drives  
PCI expansion slots:  
— Four 33 MHz 64-bit hot-plug  
— Two 66 MHz 64-bit non-hot-plug  
Hot-swap power supplies:  
250 W (115-230 V ac)  
— Minimum: Two  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
— Maximum: Four  
— Three for redundancy  
Redundant cooling:  
— Four hot-swap fan assemblies  
Video:  
— S3 video controller  
— Compatible with SVGA and VGA  
— 4 MB video memory  
Size  
Height: 356 mm (14 in.)  
— Depth: 650 mm (25.6 in.)  
— Width: 440 mm (17.3 in.)  
— Weight: 34.4 kg (76 lb.) to 61 kg (134 lb.) depending upon configuration  
Integrated functions:  
— Advanced System Management processor  
— Dual Ultra-2 (LVD) SCSI controller, one external port, one internal port  
— One 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX AMD Ethernet controller  
— Two serial ports  
— One parallel port  
— Two Universal Serial Bus ports  
— Keyboard port  
— Mouse port  
— Video port  
— One management port  
— Two Advanced System Management Interconnect ports  
Acoustical noise emissions:  
— Sound power, idling: 6.3 bel maximum  
— Sound power, operating: 6.3 bel maximum  
— Sound pressure, idle: 49 dBa maximum  
— Sound pressure, operating: 49 dBa maximum  
Environment:  
— Air temperature:  
Server on: 10º to 35º C (50º to 95º F). Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)  
Server on: 10º to 32º C (50º to 89.6º F). Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m  
(7000 ft.)  
Server off: 10º to 43º C (50º to 110º F). Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)  
Humidity:  
Server on: 8% to 80%  
Server off: 8% to 80%  
Heat output:  
Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units (BTU) per hour:  
— Minimum configuration:1023.9 BTU  
— Maximum configuration: 2764.6 BTU  
Electrical input:  
— Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz) required  
— Input voltage low range:  
Minimum: 90 V ac  
Maximum: 137 V ac  
4
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— Input voltage high range:  
Minimum: 180 V ac  
Maximum: 265 V ac  
— Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately:  
Minimum: 0.08 kVA  
Maximum: 0.52 kVA  
Server features  
The unique design of the server takes advantage of advancements in symmetric  
multiprocessing (SMP), data storage, and memory protection. The server combines:  
Impressive performance using an innovative approach to SMP  
The server supports up to four Pentium III Xeon microprocessors. The server  
comes with one microprocessor installed; you can install additional  
microprocessors to enhance performance and provide SMP capability.  
Integrated disk-array subsystem (optional)  
Although many operating systems provide software fault tolerance through  
mirroring, IBM provides hardware fault tolerance through the redundant array of  
independent disks (RAID) controller. The IBM ServeRAID™ controller is a  
standard feature. It provides three channels and supports RAID levels 0, 1, 1E, 5,  
and 5E.  
Large data-storage and hot-swap capabilities  
All models of the server support up to 10 slim-high disk drives. The hot-swap  
feature enables you to remove and replace hard disk drives without turning off  
the server.  
Hot-plug PCI adapter capabilities  
The server has four hot-plug slots for PCI adapters. With operating system  
support, you can replace failing hot-plug PCI adapters without turning off the  
server. If the hot-add feature is supported by the operating system and the PCI  
adapter, you can also add PCI adapters in these slots without turning off the  
server.  
Redundant cooling and power capabilities  
The redundant cooling and hot-swap capabilities of the fans in the server enable  
continued operation if one of the fans fails, because you can replace a failing fan  
without turning off the server.  
The server comes standard with three 250-watt power supplies, which support  
redundancy for a typical configuration. You can install one additional power  
supply.  
Large system memory  
The memory bus in the server supports up to 16 GB of system memory. The  
memory controller provides error correcting code (ECC) support for up to 16  
industry-standard, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered, dual inline memory modules  
(DIMMs). The memory controller also provides Chipkill™ memory protection.  
Chipkill memory protection is a technology that protects the system from  
component failure on a DIMM.  
System-management capabilities  
The server comes with a Advanced System Management Processor. This  
processor enables you to manage the functions of the server locally and remotely.  
The Advanced System Management Processor also provides system monitoring,  
event recording, and dial-out alert capability.  
General information  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The Advanced System Management Processor is sometimes referred to as  
the service processor.  
information.  
Integrated network environment support  
The server comes with an Ethernet controller. This Ethernet controller has an  
interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps networks. The server  
automatically selects between 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX. The controller  
provides full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission  
and reception of data on the Ethernet local area network (LAN).  
Redundant network-interface card  
The addition of an optional, redundant network interface card (NIC) provides a  
failover capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with  
the primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic associated with this primary  
connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. This switching  
occurs without data loss and without user intervention.  
IBM ServerGuide CDs  
The ServerGuide CDs included with the server provide programs to help you set  
up the server and install the network operating system (NOS). The ServerGuide  
program detects the hardware options that are installed, and provides the correct  
configuration program and device drivers. In addition, the ServerGuide CDs  
include a variety of application programs for the server.  
Reliability, availability, and serviceability  
Three of the most important features in server design are reliability, availability, and  
serviceability (RAS). These factors help to ensure the integrity of the data stored on  
the server; that the server is available when you want to use it; and that should a  
failure occur, you can easily diagnose and repair the failure with minimal  
inconvenience.  
The following is an abbreviated list of the RAS features that the server supports.  
Active PCI (hot-plug) adapter slots  
Alert on LAN™ capability  
Ambient temperature monitoring  
Automatic error retry/ recovery  
Automatic restart after a power failure  
Backup basic input/ output system (BIOS) switching under the control of the  
service processor  
Built-in, menu-driven electronically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM)  
based diagnostics  
Built-in temperature/ fan/ voltages monitoring  
Chipkill memory protection  
Cooling fans with speed-sensing capability (hot-swap)  
Error codes and messages  
Error correcting code (ECC) L2 cache  
ECC FSBs  
ECC memory  
Fast power-on self-test (POST)  
Fault-resistant startup  
45° C (113° F) normal operating temperature for hard disk drives  
Hot-plug Universal Serial bus (USB) keyboard and mouse  
Hot-swap drive bays  
Hot-swap hard disk drives  
6
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Information and diagnostic light-emitting diode (LED) panels  
Integrated Advanced System Management processor subsystem provides control  
for remote system management  
Light Path Diagnostics™ (LED panel)  
Memory scrubbing and Predictive Failure Analysis™ (PFA) (background and real  
time)  
Menu-driven setup, system configuration, SCSISelect configuration, and  
diagnostic programs  
Microcode and diagnostic levels available  
NIC failover support  
Parity checking on the small computer system interface (SCSI) bus and PCI buses  
Power and temperature monitoring  
Power Managed - Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) level  
Power-on self-test (POST)  
Power-supply redundancy monitoring  
Predictive Failure Analysis™ (PFA) alerts  
Processor serial number access  
Redundant Ethernet capabilities (with optional adapter)  
Redundant hot-swap cooling  
Redundant hot-swap power supplies  
Remote Connect  
Remote system problem-determination support  
Standard cables present detection  
Standby voltage for system management features and monitoring  
System auto-configuring from a configuration menu  
System error logging (POST and Advanced System Management processor)  
2
System management monitoring via Intra-Integrated Circuit (I C) bus  
Upgradable flash read-only memory (ROM) resident code  
Upgradable POST, basic input/ output system (BIOS), diagnostics, and Advanced  
System Management processor microcode  
Vital Product Data (VPD) on processors, processor board, I/ O board, power  
supplies, hard disk drive backplane, power backplane, and voltage regulator  
modules (VRMs)  
Wake on LAN™ capability  
Wake on Ring capability  
Windows NT failover support  
xSeries Server Management  
Controls and indicators  
The following illustration shows the controls and indicators on the server.  
General information  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Information LED panel  
Power-control button  
Reset button  
Diskette drive in-use light  
Diskette-eject button  
CD-ROM drive in-use light  
CD-ROM eject/load button  
Hard-disk drive  
activity light  
Hard-disk drive  
status light  
Hard-disk drive status light:  
Each of the hot-swap drives has a status light. When this amber light is on  
continuously, the drive has failed. When the light flashes slowly (one flash  
per second), the drive is being rebuilt. When the light flashes rapidly (three  
flashes per second) the controller is identifying the drive.  
Hard-disk activity light:  
Each of the hot-swap drives has a hard-disk activity light. When this green  
light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.  
CD-ROM eject/load button:  
Press this button to eject or retract the CD-ROM tray.  
CD-ROM drive in-use light:  
When this light is on, the CD-ROM drive is being accessed.  
Diskette-eject button:  
Press this button to eject a diskette from the drive.  
Diskette drive in-use light:  
When this light is on, the diskette drive is being accessed.  
Reset button:  
Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on self-test (POST).  
Power control button:  
Press this button to manually turn on or off the server.  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and/or the power switch on the  
power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device.  
The device also might have more than one power cord. To remove all  
8
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are  
disconnected from the power source.  
1
2
3
You can start the server in several ways:  
You can turn on the server by pressing the Power Control button on the  
front of the server.  
Note: After you plug the power cords of your server into electrical  
outlets, wait 20 seconds before pressing the Power Control button.  
During this time the system-management processor is initializing  
and the Power Control button does not respond.  
If the server is turned on, a power failure occurs, and unattended- start  
mode is enabled in the Configuration/ Setup utility program, the server  
will start automatically when power is restored.  
If AC power is present, the server is off, and the wake-up feature is  
enabled in the Configuration/ Setup utility program, the wake-up feature  
will turn on the server at the set time.  
If AC power is present, the server is off, and ring signal detect is enabled  
in the Configuration/ Setup utility program, you can turn on the server  
by telephone input.  
The Advanced System Management Processor also can turn on the server.  
You can turn off the server in several ways:  
You can turn off the server by pressing the Power Control button on the  
front of the server. Pressing the Power Control button starts an orderly  
shutdown of the operating system, if this feature is supported by your  
operating system, and places the server in standby mode.  
Note: After turning off the server, wait at least 5 seconds before pressing  
the Power Control button to power the server on again.  
You can press and hold the Power Control button for more than 4 seconds  
to cause an immediate shutdown of the server and place the server in  
standby mode. You can use this feature if the operating system stalls.  
You can disconnect the server power cords from the electrical outlets to  
shut off all power to the server.  
Note: Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting the power cords for  
your system to stop running. Watch for the System Power light on  
the operator information panel to stop blinking.  
Information LED panel:  
The lights on this panel give status information for the server. See  
General information  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information LED panel  
The following illustration shows the status lights on the Information LED panel.  
POST-complete  
System power  
OK  
System error  
Information  
1
2
3
4
TX  
RX  
100 LINK  
MB OK  
Hard disk drive  
activity  
Processor  
activity  
Ethernet speed  
Ethernet-link  
status  
Ethernet  
transmit/receive  
activity  
System power light:  
When this green light is on, power is present in the server. When this light  
flashes, the server is in standby mode (the system power supply is turned off  
and ac current is present). When this light is off, the power subsystem, the ac  
power, or a light has failed.  
Attention: If the system power light is off, it does not mean there is no  
electrical current present in the server. The light might be burned  
out. To remove all electrical current from the server, you must  
unplug the server power cords from the electrical outlets or from  
the uninterruptible power device.  
POST-complete light:  
This green light is on when the power-on self-test (POST) completes without  
any errors.  
Hard disk drive activity light:  
This green light flickers when there is activity on a hard disk drive.  
Information light:  
When this amber light is on, the server power supplies are nonredundant or  
some other noncritical event has occurred. The event is recorded in the Event  
page 46. A light on the diagnostic panel may also be on; see “Diagnostic  
System error light:  
This amber light is on when a system error occurs. A light on the diagnostics  
LED panel will also be on to further isolate the error. (For more information,  
Ethernet transmit/receive activity light:  
When this green light is on, there is activity between the server from the  
network.  
Ethernet-link status light:  
When this green light is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.  
10 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet speed 100 Mbps:  
When this green light is on, the Ethernet speed is 100 Mbps. When the light is  
off, the Ethernet speed is 10 Mbps.  
Processor activity light:  
One or more of these green lights are on when there is microprocessor  
activity. The number of lights that are on indicates the number of  
microprocessors with activity.  
General information 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics  
s
tnetn  
o
C
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Starting the diagnostic programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Diagnostic error message tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Power supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Diagnostic panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Power checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Temperature checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Recovering BIOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Diagnosing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . 35  
Network connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart. . . . . . . 36  
Ethernet controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver  
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages . . . . . . 40  
UNIX messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
POST beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
POST error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Event/ error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Small computer system interface messages . . . . . 14  
Solving ServeRAID problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
ServeRAID controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
ServeRAID startup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error codes .  
19  
Rebuilding a defunct drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Steps for recovering from defunct drives . . . . . . . 24  
Rebuilding a hot-swap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical  
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Recovering from a failure in a failover-environment  
25  
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover  
pair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Diagnostic programs and error messages . . . . . . . 25  
This section provides basic troubleshooting information to help you resolve some  
common problems that might occur with the server.  
If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this section,  
refer to “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143 for more information.  
Diagnostic tools overview  
The following tools are available to help you identify and resolve hardware-related  
problems:  
POST beep codes, error messages, and error logs  
The power-on self-test (POST) generates beep codes and messages to indicate  
successful test completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST” on page 14  
for more information.  
Diagnostic programs and error messages  
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory  
(ROM) on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing  
the major components of the server. See “Diagnostic programs and error  
messages” on page 25 for more information.  
Light path diagnostics  
Your server has light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to help you identify problems with  
server components. These LEDs are part of the light-path diagnostics that are  
built into the server. By following the path of lights, you can quickly identify the  
type of system error that occurred. See “Light path diagnostics” on page 28 for  
more information.  
Error symptoms  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
These charts list problem symptoms, along with suggested steps to correct the  
problems. See the “Diagnosing errors” on page 35 for more information.  
POST  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of  
server components and some of the options installed in the server. This series of tests  
is called the power-on self-test or POST.  
If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds, the first screen  
of the operating system or application program appears, and the System POST  
Complete (OK) light is illuminated on the operator information panel.  
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds and an error message appears  
information.  
Notes:  
1. If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type  
the password and press Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.  
2. A single problem might cause several error messages. When this occurs, work to  
correct the cause of the first error message. After you correct the cause of the first  
error message, the other error messages usually will not occur the next time you  
run the test.  
POST beep codes  
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful completion or the detection of a  
problem.  
One beep indicates the successful completion of POST.  
More than one beep indicates that POST detected a problem. For more  
POST error messages  
POST error messages occur during startup when POST finds a problem with the  
hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration. For a list of POST  
Event/error logs  
The POST error log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that the  
system generated during POST. The System Event/ Error Log contains all error  
messages issued during POST and all system status messages from the Advanced  
System Management Processor.  
To view the contents of the error logs, start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program;  
then, select Event/Error Logs from the main menu.  
Small computer system interface messages  
If you receive a SCSI error message, see “SCSI error codes” on page 165.  
Note: If the server does not have a hard disk drive, ignore any message that indicates  
that the BIOS is not installed.  
14 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
You will get these messages only when running the SCSISelect Utility.  
Solving ServeRAID problems  
This section describes the ServeRAID text and numeric messages that might appear  
during startup. This section also includes some basic information about rebuilding a  
defunct drive.  
In addition to the information provided in this section, you might want to use the  
ServeRAID IPSSEND program to help isolate ServeRAID problems.  
ServeRAID controller messages  
This section lists the ServeRAID messages that might appear during system startup.  
The ServeRAID controllers provide a Device Event Log that collects statistics on the  
number and types of events that occur on a selected physical drive. After correcting a  
problem with the array, clear the log so that you can identify any subsequent errors  
quickly. For information about clearing the event log, see "eraseevent" on page 137.  
All physical drives contain unique identifiers, such as the drive serial number and  
manufacturer. During configuration, the ServeRAID controller stores this  
information.  
ServeRAID startup messages  
During power-on self-test (POST), the ServeRAID controller compares the stored  
configuration information to the configuration that is actually present. If a  
discrepancy exists, one or more status messages appear after POST completes, but  
before the operating system loads.  
Notes:  
1. When the ServeRAID controller requires your input, a list of function keys will  
appear below the message.  
2. Where the Action information tells you to start the IBM ServeRAID configuration  
program, insert the IBM ServeRAID Support CD into the CD-ROM drive; then,  
restart the server. The Action column also provides general information about  
the message.  
3. Where SID or ch appears in these messages, sid is the SCSI ID for the device, and  
ch is the channel to which the device is attached.  
4. Where m or n appears in these messages, a number will appear in the actual  
message.  
Following are messages associated with the ServeRAID subsystem in alphabetical  
order.  
A new drive was installed.  
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects a new drive that is not part of the  
current configuration, the following message appears:  
x new ready drives found  
where x is the number of ready drives found.  
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.  
Diagnostics 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Auto rearrange.  
Explanation: Auto rearrange is enabled or disabled.  
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.  
Battery-Backup Write Cache Not Responding  
Explanation: BIOS code detected a bad or failed battery-backup write cache.  
Action: Press F9 to remove the battery-backup write cache from the configuration, or press  
F10 to exit without change.  
Battery-Backup Write Cache Replacement  
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller detects that the battery-backup write cache is  
defective.  
Action: Press F8 if you replaced the battery-backup write cache, or press F10 if you have not  
replaced the battery-backup write cache.  
Configured drives are missing.  
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that a previously configured drive is  
missing, the following message appears:  
x online drives not responding  
where x is the number of drives not responding. Example of a possible message: Online  
Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 3 is not responding.  
Action: Press one of the following keys:  
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the  
example message above.  
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For example, press F4 after you turn on  
the external storage enclosure that contains the physical drive.  
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drives to defunct. Press this key to accept the new  
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID  
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty. You can also press F5 when you  
must remove a drive. RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives are present, and  
performance in a degraded mode is acceptable. The ServeRAID controller will assign the  
drive a state of defunct, but the server can complete startup. However, the array will remain  
in critical mode and the potential for data loss will exist until you replace and rebuild the  
defunct drive. To prevent the loss of data, replace and rebuild the defunct drive in a timely  
manner.  
Note: A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to  
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:  
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane and to the physical drive.  
Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.  
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.  
3. Try rebuilding the drive if you have not already done so. See “Rebuilding a  
defunct drive” on page 23 for more information.  
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the  
drive.  
F10 – Continue booting without changing the configuration. Press this key to continue  
without change to the configuration.  
16 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configured drives are not in the configured location.  
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that a previously configured drive is  
present, but the drive is in a new location, the following message appears:  
x online drive has been rearranged  
where x is the number of drives that have been rearranged. Examples of possible messages  
are:  
Online Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 4 moved to Channel 3 SCSI ID 3  
Online Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 3 moved to Channel 3 SCSI ID 4  
Action: Press one of the following keys:  
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the  
example messages above.  
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For example, press F4 after you move  
the physical drive to its previously assigned location.  
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drive to defunct. Press this key to accept the new  
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID  
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty.  
Note: A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to  
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:  
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane and to the physical drive.  
Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.  
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.  
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the drive, try rebuilding it. See  
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the  
drive.  
F6 – Change the configuration and accept the rearrangement. Press this key to modify the  
configuration to match the current drive location. You might remove the hot-swap drives  
from the server for security or maintenance reasons. If you replace the drives but install them  
in different drive bays, you can press F6 to accept the new locations, and the ServeRAID  
controller will update the configuration.  
F10 – Continue startup without changing the configuration. Press this key to continue  
without change to the configuration.  
Controller is not responding to commands. No logical drives are installed.  
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller is not operational.  
Action: Run the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and reseat the adapter. If the problem persists,  
replace the adapter.  
Error: Cannot disable this controller BIOS.  
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller was unable to prevent an extra copy of its BIOS code  
from being stored on the server. This condition occurs when the server contains multiple  
ServeRAID controllers.  
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.  
Installation stopped.  
Explanation: The server cannot access the ServeRAID controller.  
Action: This is a follow-on message to a preceding message. Follow the Action instructions  
for the preceding message to resolve the problem.  
Diagnostics 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
New controller installed in a configured server or drives are imported.  
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that the identifiers of the drives do not  
match the controller configuration information, the following message appears: x online  
drive(s) found with mismatch configuration Examples of possible messages:  
Configuration mismatch Channel 1 SCSI ID 0 with Host ID  
Configuration mismatch Channel 2 SCSI ID 0 with Host ID  
Action: Press one of the following keys:  
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the  
example messages above.  
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting the problem. For example, press F4 after you move  
the physical drive to its previously assigned location, or after you install the original physical  
drives back in the server.  
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drive to defunct. Press this key to accept the new  
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID  
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty.  
Note: A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to  
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:  
1. All cables are connected properly to the backplane or processor or I/ O board, and to the  
physical drive. Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.  
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.  
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild the drive, try rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding  
a defunct drive” on page 23 for more information.  
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the  
drive.  
F7 – Import configuration information from drive. Press this key to restart the server. Press  
this key to import the configuration information from the drive and to update the  
configuration information for the ServeRAID controller. This choice is useful when you  
replace the ServeRAID controller in an existing ServeRAID subsystem. You also might press  
F7 if you replace a whole set of drives with drives that were configured in another server with  
a ServeRAID controller. When you install drives in a server that has no logical drives  
defined, the F7 choice will not appear. The ServeRAID controller does not contain any logical  
drives in its factory configuration. Therefore, F7 will not appear. In this case, do the  
following:  
1. Restart the server and press Ctrl+I to enter the Mini-Configuration program (see “Using  
2. Select Advanced Functions.  
3. Select Copy the Configuration from Drives to the Controller and follow the instructions  
on the screen.  
Recoverable configuration error.  
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM does not match the configuration  
data stored in the EEPROM.  
Action:  
1. Press Ctrl+I to access the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration menu.  
2. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu.  
3. Select Copy the Configuration from Drives to the Controller.  
18 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unrecoverable configuration error.  
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM does not match the configuration  
data stored in the EEPROM.  
Action:  
1. Press Ctrl+I to access the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration menu.  
2. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu.  
3. Select Restore to the Factory Default Settings.  
WARNING: n logical drives are critical; n logical drives are offline.  
Explanation: One or more physical drives have failed.  
Action: Replace the defunct drives as soon as possible to prevent data loss.  
Your server has an error due to a Blocked Logical Drive.  
Explanation: One or more logical drives are blocked. A blocked logical drive cannot be  
accessed.  
Action: Press F4 to unblock the logical drive, or press F5 to continue without unblocking.  
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error  
codes  
After the ServeRAID POST completes, register information appears on the screen in  
hexadecimal format, as follows:  
Hardware: ISPR=aaaa BCS=bb ECS=cc  
ISPR displays the four-digit Interrupt Status Report Register code, BCS displays the  
Basic Configuration Status Register code, and ECS displays the Extended  
Configuration Status Register code.  
For example:  
Controller 1 Slot 5, Status:Not responding properly - Error Code=0B0  
Controller 2 Slot 4, Logical Drive=0, Other=0, Firmware=2.88.10, Status=Ok  
Controller 3 Slot 3, Logical Drive=0, Other=0, Firmware=3.60.13, Status=Ok  
Controller 4 Slot 2, Logical Drive=1, Other=1, Firmware=1.00.09, Status=Ok  
If no errors occur:  
ISPR (aaaa) = EF10  
BCS (bb) = 0F or 09  
ECS (cc) = 00  
If an error occurs, refer to: “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes” on page 161 for the  
ISPR error codes and “Basic and Extended Configuration Status Register Codes” on  
page 20 for the BCS and ECS error codes.  
Diagnostics 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic and Extended Configuration Status Register Codes:  
BCS  
ECS  
Explanation and possible recovery action  
Code not in Code not  
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller is not functioning  
table  
00  
in table  
properly.  
Action: Replace the adapter or the I/ O board with integrated  
controller.  
01  
Explanation: Invalid flash configuration.  
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the  
instructions that appear on the screen.  
00  
02  
Explanation: Invalid NVRAM configuration.  
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the  
instructions that appear on the screen.  
00  
03  
Explanation: Invalid flash and NVRAM configuration.  
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the  
instructions that appear on the screen.  
01  
08  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
01  
18  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild and hot-spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not  
responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
01  
01  
28  
38  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild, hot-spare/ standby hot-spare, and  
ready/ standby drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
01  
01  
01  
48  
58  
68  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild drives are not responding and unidentified drives  
were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild and hot-spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not  
responding and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not responding  
and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
20 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BCS  
01  
ECS  
78  
Explanation and possible recovery action  
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or  
online/ rebuild, hot-spare/ standby hot-spare, and  
ready/ standby drives are not responding and unidentified  
drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
88  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild drives are not  
responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
98  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild and hot  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
A8  
B8  
C8  
D8  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild and ready/ standby  
drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild, hot-spare/ standby  
hot-spare, and ready/ standby drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild drives are not  
responding and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild and hot-  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding and  
unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
03  
03  
E8  
F8  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild and ready/ standby  
drives are not responding and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it  
has valid configuration, and online/ rebuild, hot-spare/ standby  
hot-spare, and ready/ standby drives are not responding and  
unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.  
07  
08  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Diagnostics 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BCS  
07  
ECS  
0C  
Explanation and possible recovery action  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild drives are not responding, and a  
drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
07  
18  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and hot-spare/ standby hot-spare  
drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
1C  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and hot spare/ standby hot-spare  
drives are not responding, and a drive was found at the incorrect  
SCSI ID.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
07  
07  
07  
28  
2C  
38  
3C  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not  
responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not  
responding, and a drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild, ready/ standby, and hot-  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild, ready/ standby, and hot-  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding, and a drive  
was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
07  
48  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild drives are not responding, and  
unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
4C  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild drives are not responding, and a  
drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and unidentified drives  
were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
07  
58  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and hot spare/ standby hot-spare  
drives are not responding, and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
5C  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and hot spare/ standby hot-spare  
drives are not responding, a drive was found at the incorrect  
SCSI ID, and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
68  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not  
responding, and unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
22 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BCS  
07  
ECS  
6C  
Explanation and possible recovery action  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild and ready/ standby drives are not  
responding, a drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and  
unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
07  
07  
78  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild, ready/ standby, and hot-  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding, and  
unidentified drives were found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
7C  
Explanation: Online/ rebuild, ready/ standby, and hot-  
spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not responding, a drive was  
found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and unidentified drives were  
found.  
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.  
Explanation: No error occurred.  
09  
09  
00  
10  
Action: No action is required.  
Explanation: Hot-spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not  
responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
09  
09  
20  
30  
Explanation: Ready/ standby drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Explanation: Hot-spare/ standby hot-spare and ready/ standby  
drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
0F  
0F  
00  
10  
Explanation: No error occurred.  
Action: No action is required.  
Explanation: Hot-spare/ standby hot-spare drives are not  
responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
0F  
0F  
20  
30  
Explanation: Ready/ standby drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Explanation: Hot-spare/ standby hot-spare and ready/ standby  
drives are not responding.  
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.  
Rebuilding a defunct drive  
A physical drive is defunct when there is a loss of communication between the  
controller and the physical drive. This can be caused by any of the following:  
An improperly connected cable, physical drive, or controller  
A loss of power to a drive  
A defective cable, backplane, physical drive or controller  
Diagnostics 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In each case, the communication problem needs to be resolved, and then a rebuild  
operation is required to reconstruct the data for the device in its disk array. The  
ServeRAID controllers can reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives,  
but they cannot reconstruct data stored in RAID level-0 logical drives.  
To prevent data-integrity problems, the ServeRAID controllers sets the RAID level-0  
logical drives to blocked during a rebuild operation. After the rebuild operation  
completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives, and access them once  
again. Remember, however, that the logical drive might contain damaged data.  
Steps for recovering from defunct drives  
If the defunct drives are part of an array, do the following:  
If more than one physical drive in an array is defunct, replace DDD drives and  
restore from backup.  
If a rebuild operation is in progress, wait until the rebuild is complete.  
If a rebuild is not in progress and only one physical drive in the array is defunct,  
replace the drive.  
Rebuilding a hot-swap drive  
A hot-swap rebuild refers to a rebuild operation that is started by the ServeRAID  
controller when it detects that a drive that is part of a RAID-I or RAID-J array and in  
the defunct state has been removed and reinserted on the SCSI backplane. The  
reinsertion of the physical drive, whether it is the same drive or a new drive, will  
trigger the ServeRAID controller to start the rebuild operation. During the rebuild  
operation, the drive being rebuilt is in the rebuild state, and the logical drive remains  
critical until the rebuild operation has been successfully completed.  
On IBM servers, when a hot-spare drive is available, the rebuild operation will begin  
automatically without the requirement to replace the failed drive.  
To start a hot-swap rebuild, do the following:  
1. Without removing the drive completely, gently remove the physical drive from  
the server, using the handle of the hot-swap tray. If necessary, refer to the  
documentation that comes with your server on removing a physical drive.  
2. Wait 20 seconds to allow the physical drive to completely spin down.  
Note: When power is removed from a hot-swap drive, the drive immediately  
parks the heads, locks the actuator in the "landing zone", and begins  
spinning down. However, the spinning down of the disk might require up  
to 20 seconds after power is removed. Do not move the drive while it is  
spinning down. Moving the drive while it is spinning down may damage  
the drive.  
3. Gently replace into the server the physical drive that you removed. Make sure the  
drive is completely installed in the backplane connector.  
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical  
drive  
During formatting of a physical drive, if the format process is stopped by a system  
reset, system shut down, power outage, or by some other means, the physical drive  
becomes inoperable.  
To enable the physical drive to communicate with the ServeRAID controller again, do  
the following:  
24 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1. Note the channel of the ServeRAID controller to which the physical drive is  
connected.  
2. Note the SCSI ID of the physical drive.  
3. Use ipssend format to restart the format of the physical drive. The syntax is:  
ipssend format controller channel sid  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)  
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)  
After the format is complete, the ServeRAID controller will be able to recognize  
the drive again.  
Recovering from a failure in a failover-environment  
In a failover environment, when the ServeRAID device driver is unable to send a  
command to the primary controller and the primary controller does not respond to a  
reset command, the device driver attempts to failover to the secondary controller.  
Note: Loose cables or defective physical drives will not cause a failover to occur.  
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover pair  
If a failed controller is not in a hot-plug PCI slot, do the following to replace it:  
1. Shutdown the server.  
2. Replace the failed controller.  
3. Reconfigure the new controller.  
Notes:  
1. Be sure the firmware level of the new controller is the same as the controller you  
are replacing. Be sure to use the same controller name, partner name, and SCSI  
initiator ID for the controller you are replacing.  
2. For detailed instructions, refer to the Hardware Maintenance Manual for the  
ServeRAID controller being serviced.  
If the failed controller is in a hot-plug slot, refer to the documentation that comes with  
the server for instructions for replacing the controller.  
Diagnostic programs and error messages  
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)  
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major  
components of the server.  
Diagnostic error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be  
used to identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems  
that are indicated by error messages should be performed by trained service  
personnel.  
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the server  
displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action  
instructions for the first error message that appears.  
The following sections contain the error codes that might appear in the detailed test  
log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs.  
Diagnostics 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The error code format is as follows:  
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message  
where:  
fff  
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being  
tested when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is for  
the microprocessor.  
ttt  
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that  
was encountered.  
iii  
is the three-digit device ID.  
date  
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.  
is the check digit that is used to verify the validity of the information.  
is the diagnostic message that indicates the reason for the problem.  
cc  
text message  
Text messages  
The diagnostic text message format is as follows:  
Function Name: Result (test specific string)  
where:  
Function Name  
is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred. This  
corresponds to the function code (fff) given in the previous list.  
Result can be one of the following:  
Passed This result occurs when the diagnostic test completes without any  
errors.  
Failed This result occurs when the diagnostic test discovers an error.  
User Aborted  
This result occurs when you stop the diagnostic test before it is  
complete.  
Not Applicable  
This result occurs when you specify a diagnostic test for a device that  
is not present.  
Aborted This result occurs when the test could not proceed because of the  
system configuration.  
Warning This result occurs when a possible problem is reported during the  
diagnostic test, such as when a device that is to be tested is not  
installed.  
Test Specific String  
This is additional information that you can use to analyze the problem.  
Starting the diagnostic programs  
You can press F1 while running the diagnostic programs to obtain Helpinformation.  
You also can press F1 from within a help screen to obtain online documentation from  
which you can select different categories. To exit Helpand return to where you left  
off, press Esc.  
To start the diagnostic programs:  
26 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.  
Note: To run the diagnostic programs, you must start the server with the highest  
level password that is set. That is, if an administrator password is set, you  
must enter the administrator password, not the power-on password, to  
run the diagnostic programs.  
2. When the message F2 for Diagnosticsappears, press F2.  
3. Type in the appropriate password when prompted; then, press Enter.  
4. Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.  
5. When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears, select the test you want to run  
from the list that appears; then, follow the instructions on the screen.  
Notes:  
a. If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server  
and try running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem persists, flash  
server with the latest diagnostics code and run the test again.  
b. The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests assume that a keyboard and  
mouse are attached to the server.  
c. If you run the diagnostic programs with no mouse attached to the server, you  
will not be able to navigate between test categories using the Next Cat and  
Prev Catbuttons. All other functions provided by mouse-selectable buttons  
are also available using the function keys.  
d. You can run the USB interface test and the USB external loopback test only if  
there are no USB devices attached.  
e. You can view server configuration information (such as system configuration,  
memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory access (DMA)  
use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from the top of the  
screen.  
When the tests have completed, you can view the Test Log by selecting Utility from  
the top of the screen.  
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal server  
operations, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software problem,  
refer to the information that comes with the software package.  
Viewing the test log  
The test log will not contain any information until after the diagnostic program has  
run.  
Note: If you already are running the diagnostic programs, begin with step 3..  
To view the test log:  
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.  
If the server is on, shut down the operating system and restart the server.  
2. When the message F2 for Diagnosticsappears, press F2.  
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts you  
for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.  
3. When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears, select Utility from the top of the  
screen.  
4. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then, follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
Diagnostics 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The system maintains the test-log data while the server is powered on. When you  
turn off the power to the server, the test log is cleared.  
Diagnostic error message tables  
For descriptions of the error messages that might appear when you run the diagnostic  
programs, see “Diagnostic error codes” on page 148. If diagnostic error messages  
appear that are not listed in those tables, make sure that the server has the latest levels  
of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, ServeRAID, and diagnostics  
microcode installed.  
Light path diagnostics  
The server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some server components.  
These LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics built into the server. By following  
the path of lights you can quickly identify the type of system error that occurred.  
Power supply LEDs  
The AC and DC power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about  
location of these LEDs. See “Power checkout” on page 32 for more information on  
power problems.  
Handle  
Filler panel  
DC power light  
AC power light  
The following table describes the AC and DC power LEDs.  
AC power  
LED  
DC power  
LED  
Description and action  
On  
On  
The power supply is on and operating correctly.  
28 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AC power  
LED  
DC power  
LED  
Description and action  
There is a dc power problem.  
On  
Off  
Possible causes:  
1. The server is not turned on (the power LED is blinking on  
the front of the server).  
Action: Press the power-control button to start the server.  
2. The power supply has failed.  
Action: Replace the power supply.  
Off  
Off  
There is an ac power problem.  
Possible causes:  
1. There is no ac power to the power supply.  
Actions: Verify that:  
The electrical cord is properly connected to  
the server.  
The electrical outlet functions properly.  
2. The power supply has failed.  
Action: Replace the power supply.  
Diagnostic panel LEDs  
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the diagnostics panel inside the server.  
See Table 1 on page 31 for information on identifying problems using these LEDs.  
SP  
PCIA  
VRM  
PCIB  
FAN  
PCIC  
NMI  
SMI  
DASD1  
CPU  
MEM  
TEMP  
NON  
RED  
OVER  
SPEC  
PS2  
PS1  
PS3  
PS4  
Light path diagnostics  
You can use the light path diagnostics built into the server to quickly identify the type  
of system error that occurred. The server is designed so that LEDs remain illuminated  
when the server shuts down, as long as the power supplies are operating properly.  
This feature helps you to isolate the problem if an error causes the server to shut  
down.  
If the system error LED (on the information LED panel) is not lit and no diagnostics  
panel LEDs are lit, it means that the light path diagnostics have not detected a system  
error.  
Diagnostics 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If the system error LED (on the information LED panel) is lit, it means that a system  
error was detected. Check to see which of the LEDs on the diagnostics panel inside  
the server are lit and refer to the following table:  
30 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED  
None  
Cause  
Action  
The system error log is 75% or more full; a PFA alert  
was logged; or a failure occurred on the I2C bus.  
Check the system error log and correct any problems. See “Choices  
information about clearing the error log. Disconnecting the server from  
all power sources for at least 20 seconds will turn off the system error  
LED.  
SMI  
A systems management event occurred.  
Restart the server.  
NMI  
A nonmaskable interrupt occurred. The PCIA, PCIB,  
or PCIC LED will probably also be on.  
1.  
If the PCIA, PCIB, or PCIC LED is not on, restart the server.  
If the problem persists, try to determine the failing adapter by removing  
one adapter at a time and restarting the server after each adapter is  
removed.  
SP  
The service processor has failed.  
1.  
2.  
1.  
2.  
Run service processor diagnostics.  
Replace Legacy I/ O board.  
PCIA  
An error occurred on PCI bus A. An adapter in PCI  
slot 1 or 2, or the processor board caused the error.  
Check the error log for additional information.  
If you cannot correct the problem from the information in the error  
log, try to determine the failing adapter by removing one adapter  
at a time from PCI bus A (PCI slots 1–2) and restarting the server  
after each adapter is removed.  
PCIB  
An error occurred on PCI bus B. An adapter in PCI slot 1.  
Check the error log for additional information.  
3, 4, 5, or 6 or the processor board caused the error.  
2.  
If you cannot correct the problem from the information in the error  
log, try to determine the failing adapter by removing one adapter  
at a time from PCI bus B (PCI slots 3–6) and restarting the server  
after each adapter is removed.  
PCIC  
An error occurred on PCI bus C. An error on the  
processor or I/ O board caused the problem.  
Check the error log for additional information. If the error log indicates  
a problem with the integrated SCSI controller, the Ethernet controller or  
DASD  
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed on SCSI channel 1.  
B.  
If the TEMP LED is also on, take the actions listed for that LED.  
2.  
If the amber status LED on one of the hot-swap hard disk drives is  
on, replace the drive.  
MEM  
CPU  
A memory error occurred.  
1.  
Check the DIMM error LEDs on the memory board.  
2.  
1.  
Replace the DIMM indicated by the lit DIMM error LEDs.  
One of the microprocessors has failed or a  
Check the microprocessor error LEDs on the memory board. If a  
microprocessor error LED is on for a microprocessor connector that  
has a terminator card installed instead of a microprocessor, the  
microprocessors are not installed in the correct order. See  
the correct order for installing microprocessors and VRMs.  
Otherwise, continue with the next step.  
microprocessor is installed in the wrong connector.  
2.  
Turn off the server, reseat the microprocessor indicated by the lit  
microprocessor error LED, and restart the server.  
3.  
1.  
2.  
If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.  
Check the VRM error LEDs on the processor board.  
VRM  
FAN  
One of the voltage regulator modules on the processor  
board has failed.  
Turn off the server, reseat the VRM indicated by the lit VRM error  
LED, and restart the server.  
3.  
If the problem persists, replace the VRM.  
One of the fan assemblies has failed or is operating too The LED on the failing fan assembly will be lit. Replace the fan  
slowly.  
assembly.  
Note:  
A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and  
DASD LEDs to be on.  
Table 1. Light path diagnostics.  
Diagnostics 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LED  
Cause  
Action  
TEMP  
The system temperature has exceeded the maximum  
rating.  
1.  
2.  
Check to see if a fan has failed. If it has, replace the fan.  
Make sure the room temperature is not too high. (See “Features  
If the problem persists, see Temperature checkout”.  
NON  
RED  
Server drawing too much power to operate in a  
redundant power mode.  
System can continue to operate in a nonredundant power mode. To  
operate in a redundant mode, add a power supply or remove most  
recently installed options.  
OVER  
SPEC  
The server is drawing more power than the power  
supplies are rated for.  
Either add a power supply or remove a device from the server.  
PS1  
PS2  
PS3  
PS4  
The first power supply has failed.  
The second power supply has failed.  
The third power supply has failed.  
The fourth power supply has failed.  
Replace the first power supply.  
Replace the second power supply.  
Replace the third power supply.  
Replace the fourth power supply.  
Table 1. Light path diagnostics.  
Power checkout  
Power problems can be difficult to troubleshoot. For instance, a short circuit can exist  
anywhere on any of the power distribution busses. Usually a short circuit will cause  
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition.  
A general procedure for troubleshooting power problems is as follows:  
1. Power off the system and disconnect the AC cord(s).  
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for  
instance if there is a loose screw causing a short circuit on a circuit board.  
3. Remove adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to all internal  
and external devices until system is at minimum configuration required for  
power on (see "Minimum operating requirements" on page 154).  
4. Reconnect the AC cord and power on the system. If the system powers up  
successfully, replace adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is  
isolated. If system does not power up from minimal configuration, replace FRUs  
of minimal configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
To use this method it is important to know the minimum configuration required for a  
system to power up (see page 154). For specific problems, see “Power error  
Temperature checkout  
Proper cooling of the system is important for proper operation and system reliability.  
For a typical server, you should make sure:  
Each of the drive bays has either a drive or a filler panel installed  
Each of the power supply bays has either a power supply or a filler panel installed  
The top cover is in place during normal operation  
There is at least 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated space at the sides of the server and  
100 mm (4 inches) at the rear of the server  
32 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The top cover is removed for no longer than 30 minutes while the server is  
operating  
The processor housing cover covering the processor and memory area is removed  
for no longer that ten minutes while the server is operating  
A removed hot-swap drive is replaced within two minutes of removal  
Cables for optional adapters are routed according to the instructions provided  
with the adapters (ensure that cables are not restricting air flow)  
The fans are operating correctly and the air flow is good  
A failed fan is replaced within 48 hours  
In addition, ensure that the environmental specifications for the system are met. See  
For more information on specific temperature error messages, see “Temperature error  
Recovering BIOS  
If the BIOS code in the server has become corrupted, such as from a power failure  
during a flash update, you can recover the BIOS using the recovery boot block and a  
BIOS flash diskette.  
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:  
Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.  
Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to  
http:/ / www.pc.ibm.com/ support/ , select IBM Server Support, and make  
the selections for the server.  
The flash memory of the server consists of a primary page and a backup page. The J56  
jumper controls which page is used to start the server. If the BIOS in the primary page  
is corrupted, you can use the backup page to start the server; then boot the BIOS Flash  
Diskette to restore the BIOS to the primary page.  
To recover the BIOS:  
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables and  
power cords; then, remove the cover.  
2. Locate jumper J56 on the processor board (see “Processor board jumpers” on page  
3. Move J56 to pins 1 and 2 to enable secondary boot block page.  
4. Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive.  
5. Restart the server.  
6. The system begins the power-on self-test (POST). Select 1 – Update POST/ BIOS  
from the menu that contains various flash (update) options.  
7. When you are asked if you would like to move the current POST/ BIOS image to  
the backup ROM location, type N.  
Attention: Typing Y will copy the corrupted BIOS into the secondary page.  
8. When you are asked if you would like to save the current code to a diskette, select  
N.  
9. You will be asked to choose which language you wish to use. Select your  
language (0-7) and press Enter to accept your choice. You will be prompted to  
remove the diskette and press Enter to restart the system. Remove the flash  
diskette from the diskette drive.  
Diagnostics 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Attention: Do not press Enter to reboot the system at this time.  
10. Power-off the server.  
11. Move jumper J56 back to pins 2 and 3 to return to normal startup mode.  
12. Restart the server. The system should start up normally.  
Replacing the battery  
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must be  
handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must  
adhere to the following instructions.  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an equivalent  
type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module  
containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by  
the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not  
properly used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
Throw or immerse into water  
Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Note: In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.  
If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery with  
heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental consideration.  
Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be disposed of with  
normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by the manufacturer,  
distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of in a proper manner.  
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your server and reset the  
system date and time.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Read the information in Before you begin” on page 58.  
2. Follow any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the  
battery.  
3. Turn off the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and  
power cords (see “Safety information” on page 180); then remove the top cover.  
4. Locate the battery on the processor board (see “Processor board component  
5. Remove adapters as necessary so you can access the battery. (See Working with  
6. Lift and remove the plastic dividers by pressing the latches on the top ends of the  
dividers toward the dividers and lifting the dividers from the server.  
7. Remove the battery:  
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery.  
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the rear of the server. The  
spring mechanism behind the battery will push it out toward you as you slide  
it forward.  
34 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery  
clip.  
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by  
pressing gently on the clip.  
8. Insert the new battery:  
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket, under the  
battery clip.  
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the socket.  
9. Reinstall any adapters that you removed.  
10. Insert the plastic dividers into the divider guides.  
11. Reinstall the top cover.  
Note: You must wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the power cord of  
your server into an electrical outlet before the power control button  
becomes active.  
12. Start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters  
Diagnosing errors  
To find solutions to problems that have definite symptoms, see “Error symptoms” on  
If you cannot find the problem there, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on  
page 26 to test the server.  
If you have just added new software or a new option and the server is not working, do  
the following before using the error symptoms table:  
Remove the software or device that you just added.  
Run the diagnostic tests to determine if the server is running correctly.  
Reinstall the new software or new device.  
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller  
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with  
the 10/ 100 Mbps Ethernet controller.  
Diagnostics 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network connection problems  
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following:  
Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.  
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is  
attached but the problem persists, try a different cable.  
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use Category 5  
cabling.  
If you directly connect two workstations (without a hub), or if you are not using a  
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable.  
Note: To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the label  
contains an X, the hub has an X port.  
Determine if the hub supports auto-negotiation. If not, try configuring the  
integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of  
the hub.  
Check the Ethernet controller lights on the operator information panel.  
These lights indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or hub.  
— The Ethernet Link Status light illuminates when the Ethernet controller  
receives a LINK pulse from the hub. If the light is off, there might be a  
defective connector or cable, or a problem with the hub.  
— The Ethernet Transmit/ Receive Activity light illuminates when the Ethernet  
controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet Network. If the Ethernet  
Transmit/ Receive Activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network  
are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded.  
— The Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light illuminates when the Ethernet controller  
LAN speed is 100 Mbps.  
Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers, supplied with the server.  
Check for operating system-specific causes for the problem.  
Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same  
protocol.  
Test the Ethernet controller.  
How you test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you are  
using (see the Ethernet controller device driver README file).  
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart  
You can use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/ 100 Mbps  
Ethernet controller problems that have definite symptoms.  
36 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table 2. Ethernet troubleshooting chart.  
Ethernet controller problem  
Suggested Action  
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.  
The server stops running  
when loading device drivers.  
Check the following:  
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet controller is also  
assigned to another device in the Configuration/ Setup Utility program.  
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not  
function well when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try  
changing the IRQ assigned to the Ethernet controller or the other device. For  
example, for NetWare Versions 3 and 4 it is recommended that disk controllers not  
share interrupts with LAN controllers.  
Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver available from the  
World Wide Web.  
Run the network diagnostic program.  
Ethernet Link Status light  
does not light.  
Check the following:  
Make sure that the hub is turned on.  
Check all connections at the Ethernet controller and the hub.  
Check the cable. A crossover cable is required unless the hub has an X designation.  
Use another port on the hub.  
If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure the Ethernet  
controller to match the hub.  
If you manually configured the duplex mode, make sure that you also manually  
configure the speed.  
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.  
The Ethernet Transmit/  
Receive Activity light does  
not light.  
Check the following:  
Note: The Ethernet Transmit/ Receive Activity LED illuminates only when data is  
sent to or by this Ethernet controller.  
Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.  
The network might be idle. Try sending data from this workstation.  
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.  
The function of this LED can be changed by device driver load parameters. If  
necessary, remove any LED parameter settings when you load the device drivers.  
Data is incorrect or sporadic. Check the following:  
Make sure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating the server at 100  
Mbps.  
Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise-inducing sources like  
fluorescent lights.  
The Ethernet controller  
stopped working when  
another adapter was added  
to the server.  
Check the following:  
Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet controller.  
Make sure that the PCI system BIOS is current.  
Reseat the adapter.  
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet adapter is also  
assigned to another device in the Configuration/ Setup Utility program.  
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not  
function well when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try  
changing the IRQ assigned to the Ethernet adapter or the other device.  
Diagnostics 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 2. Ethernet troubleshooting chart.  
Ethernet controller problem  
Suggested Action  
The Ethernet controller  
stopped working without  
apparent cause.  
Check the following:  
Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.  
Try a different connector on the hub.  
Reinstall the device drivers. Refer to the operating-system documentation and to  
the ServerGuide information.  
Ethernet controller messages  
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from the following device  
drivers:  
Novell™ NetWare™ or IntraNetWare Server ODI  
NDIS Adapter for level 4.0 (Windows NT)  
SCO™ UNIX LLI  
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI  
driver messages  
This section provides explanations of the error messages for the Novell NetWare or  
IntraNetWare server ODI driver, and suggested actions to resolve each problem.  
PCNTNW-NW- The MSM is unable to parse a required custom keyword.  
026  
Explanation: The user entered an incorrect parameter keyword.  
Action: Reload the driver using the correct keyword.  
PCNTNW-NW- The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.  
054  
Explanation: The adapter did not respond when the driver tried to  
initialize it.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet  
26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.  
058  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting might not be valid or  
the EEPROM information might be incorrect.  
Action: Make sure the IRQ settings are correct in the  
Configuration/ Setup Utility program. for information on setting the  
interrupt requests. If the IRQ settings are correct, go to Starting the  
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The cable might be disconnected from the adapter.  
066  
Explanation: The cable might be disconnected from the server Ethernet  
port.  
Action: Verify that a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.  
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet  
controller.  
38 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PCNTNW-NW- The matching virtual adapter could not be found.  
071  
Explanation: You tried to load another instance of the driver with a  
different I/ O address. This new adapter could not be found.  
Action: Verify that you installed an IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapter  
and make sure that the adapter is seated correctly. If the adapter is  
run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- A resource tag is unavailable.  
072  
Explanation: The driver tried to allocate some resources that were not  
available.  
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server.  
Then, restart the server.  
PCNTNW-NW- Unable to allocate memory  
073  
Explanation: The driver failed to allocate the memory needed for  
normal operation.  
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server.  
Then, restart the server.  
PCNTNW-NW- The hardware interrupt cannot be set.  
074  
Explanation: An attempt was made to initialize a given hardware  
interrupt. The attempt was not successful.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet  
26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
If you have an Ethernet adapter installed, make sure that the adapter  
does not share an IRQ with any other device.  
PCNTNW-NW- The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) cannot be registered with  
075 the Link Support Layer (LSL).  
Explanation: An error occurred while the driver was trying to register  
with the LSL.  
Action: Check the version of the NetWare or IntraNetWare Operating  
System. Make sure that this driver is correct for the version of NetWare  
or IntraNetWare that you are using. Restart the server.  
PCNTNW-NW- The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) did not initialize MSMTx  
079 Free Count.  
Explanation: The MSMTx Free Count is not initialized correctly.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the  
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The driver parameter block is too small.  
086  
Explanation: The driver parameter block is too small.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the  
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The media parameter block is too small.  
087  
Explanation: The driver media parameter block is too small.  
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the  
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet  
controller.  
Diagnostics 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCNTNW-NW- The hardware configuration conflicts.  
091  
Explanation: You tried to load a new frame type for the existing  
controller. The hardware assumptions made in doing so are incorrect.  
This error can also occur if you try to specify a mode (such as,  
redundancy) that conflicts with another specified mode.  
Action: Make sure that your hardware configuration matches the  
software settings.  
PCNTNW-NW- The group bit in the node address override was cleared.  
126  
Explanation: The IEEE address has a group bit that indicates that an  
address belongs to a group of stations. This bit is used only as a  
destination address; it cannot be used as a source address. You tried to  
enter a source address with this bit set. The driver cleared the group bit  
of the source address.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
PCNTNW-NW- The local bit in the node address override was set.  
127  
Explanation: The local bit in the IEEE address format indicates that the  
addresses are being managed locally. If you use the node address  
override capabilities of this driver to enter a new address, the local bit  
must be set. You entered an address without the local bit set. The driver  
has set the local bit.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
PCNTNW-NW- The device was not found.  
164  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet  
26 to run the diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The device was not found at IOADDRESS.  
165  
Explanation: The Ethernet controller cannot be found at the I/ O address  
specified.  
Action: The Ethernet controller does not require a parameter for the I/ O  
address. Remove the I/ O address parameter.  
PCNTNW-NW- PCI scan specified, device not found.  
167  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI  
bus.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the problem  
diagnostic programs.  
PCNTNW-NW- The DMA parameter is not necessary for PCI device.  
180  
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.  
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.  
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet  
controller.  
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages  
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 4.0 drivers. The explanation  
and recommended action are included with each message.  
40 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4. NDIS (Windows NT) driver messages for the Ethernet controller.  
PermaNetServer:  
No Secondary Adapter Found. Grouping Mode is disabled.  
Explanation: The failover option requires an adapter that is compatible with the device  
driver of the Ethernet controller on the system board. No such adapter was found.  
Action: Make sure the correct adapter is installed.  
PermaNet Server:  
Problem Occurs on the Primary Adapter. Switching over to the Secondary Adapter.  
Explanation: The system detected a problem with the primary Ethernet connection and  
has transferred all network traffic to the secondary Ethernet controller.  
Action: identify the cause of the failure on the primary Ethernet connection. Restoring  
the operational state of the primary connection will cause the network traffic to  
automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.  
PermaNet Server:  
Switching back to Primary Adapter.  
Explanation: The primary Ethernet connection is now operating correctly. Network  
traffic will automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.  
Action: None needed, message is for information only.  
UNIX messages  
This section provides descriptions of the Ethernet error messages for the SCO UNIX  
LLI driver, and suggested actions to resolve each problem.  
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-2  
PCI search specified, PCI device not found!  
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.  
Action:  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller  
Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run the  
diagnostic programs.  
pnt0-6  
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during an interrupt. Please check the Streams  
parameters.  
Explanation: On a SunSoft Solaris system, this message indicates that the system is out of  
Streams memory blocks.  
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks. Modify the  
interrupt request (IRQ) settings in the Configuration/ Setup Utility program, or run the  
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.  
pnt0-7  
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during reset. Please check the Streams parameters.  
Explanation: The system is out of Streams memory blocks.  
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.  
pnt0-11  
Device not found!  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run  
the diagnostic programs.  
Diagnostics 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-12  
pnt0-13  
pnt0-14  
pnt0-15  
pnt0-17  
pnt0-19  
Device failed checksum test!  
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run  
the diagnostic programs.  
add_intr_handler failed! Interrupts already enabled.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify the hardware settings.  
Cannot locate hardware.  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any Ethernet controller.  
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run  
the diagnostic programs.  
No more devices to open.  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any more Ethernet controllers. Action:  
Verify that additional IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the Ethernet  
adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, run the diagnostic programs.  
Device fault...Reset initiated!  
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver has been reset due to a device fault.  
Action: Verify that additional IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the  
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, run the diagnostic programs.  
IRQ found for PCnet hardware does not match space.c (or pnt.conf)!  
Explanation: This is a warning message referring to the interrupt request (IRQ) that the SunSoft  
Solaris driver found in the system.  
Action: Ignore this message if you are sure that this is what you want to do. Otherwise, run the  
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings  
pnt0-20  
pnt0-21  
pnt0-22  
add_intr_handler failed! Unknown interrupt type.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server. Action:  
Modify the hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range interrupt number.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server. Action:  
Modify the hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range IPL.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify the hardware settings. Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another  
Ethernet controller.  
42 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-23  
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already occupied.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server.  
Action: Modify the hardware settings.  
pnt0-24  
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already shared at different IPL.  
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts  
with other devices in the server. Action:  
Modify the hardware settings.  
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.  
pnt0-26  
pnt0-29  
pnt0-31  
The DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.  
Explanation: The IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapter does not require a DMA setting.  
Action: Edit the SPACE.C file to delete the DMA parameter.  
The IRQ number is already in use.  
Explanation: The specified I/ O address is already in use.  
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to modify the hardware settings.  
I/O address is not necessary for the PCI device.  
Explanation: The I/ O address specified is not required.  
Action: Remove the assigned I/ O address specified for the Ethernet controller.  
Diagnostics 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the server  
The following configuration programs are provided with the server:  
Configuration/Setup Utility  
This program is part of the basic input/output system (BIOS) code that comes with  
the server. You can use this program to configure serial and parallel port  
assignments, change interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the drive startup  
sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. See “Using the  
SCSISelect Utility  
With the built-in SCSISelect Utility program, you can configure the devices  
attached to the integrated SCSI controller. See “Using the SCSISelect utility  
program” on page 51 for more information.  
ServeRAID programs  
The ServeRAID programs come with the optional ServeRAID adapters and with  
server models that have a ServeRAID adapter preinstalled. If the server has a  
ServeRAID adapter installed, you must use the ServeRAID Configuration  
program to define and configure the disk-array subsystem before you install the  
operating system. See “Using IBM ServeRAID” on page 117 for more detailed  
information.  
ServerGuide CDs  
The ServerGuide CDs include software setup and installation tools specifically  
designed for IBM xSeries servers. You can use these CDs during the initial  
installation of the server to configure the server hardware and simplify the  
network operating system installation. The ServerGuide CDs also contain a  
collection of application programs, which you can install after the server is up and  
running.  
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program  
This section provides the instructions needed to start the Configuration/ Setup Utility  
program and descriptions of the menu choices available.  
Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program  
To start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program:  
1. Turn on the server and watch the monitor screen.  
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setupappears, press F1.  
Note: If you have set both levels of passwords (user and administrator), you  
must enter the administrator password to access the full  
Configuration/ Setup menu.  
3. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main  
menu  
From the Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu, you can select settings that you  
want to change. The Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu is similar to the  
following:  
IBM Server Setup - © IBM Corporation 2001  
Configuration/Setup Utility  
· System Summary  
· System Information  
· Devices and I/O Ports  
· Date and Time  
· System Security  
· Start Options  
· Advanced Setup  
· Error Logs  
Save Settings  
Restore Settings  
Load Default Settings  
Exit Setup  
<F1> Help  
<Esc> Exit  
<
-
> <  
¯
> Move  
<Enter> Select  
Notes:  
1. You can press F1 to display Help information for a selected menu item.  
2. The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS version  
in the server.  
Descriptions of the choices available from the main menu are as follows:  
System Summary  
Select this choice to display configuration information. This includes the type and  
speed of the microprocessors and the amount of memory installed.  
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.  
You cannot edit the fields.  
This choice appears on both the full and limited Configuration/ Setup Utility  
menus.  
System Information  
Select this choice to display information about the server. Changes that you make  
on other menus might appear on this summary screen. You cannot edit any  
fields. The System Information choice appears only on the full  
Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu.  
Product Data  
Select this choice to view system information, such as the machine type and  
model, the server serial number, and the revision level or issue date of the  
BIOS stored in the flash electronically erasable programmable ROM  
(EEPROM).  
System Card Data  
Select this choice to view vital product data (VPD) for some server  
components.  
46 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Devices and I/O Ports  
Select this choice to view or change the assignments for devices and input/ output  
ports. This choice appears only on the full Configuration/ Setup Utility main  
menu.  
Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the system date and time and to change the system time  
sent to the Advanced System Management Processor (service processor) when the  
server is started. This choice appears only on the full Configuration/ Setup Utility  
main menu.  
The system time is in a 24-hour format: hour:minute:second.  
You can set a time delta to be added or subtracted from the system time that is  
sent to the service processor (Advanced System Management Processor) each  
time the server is started. Use the number keys to enter the hours and minutes  
and + or to add or subtract from the system time. If you want the system clock  
time to be the same as the Advanced System Management Processor clock time,  
leave the value set at its default of 0.  
System Security  
Select this choice to set passwords or a system owner s name. This choice appears  
only on the full Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu.  
You can implement two levels of password protection:  
Power-on Password  
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Using  
passwords” on page 49 for more information.  
Administrator Password  
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password.  
Attention:  
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be  
overridden or removed. You must replace the I/ O Legacy board.  
The administrator password provides access to all choices on the  
Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu. You can set, change, or delete both  
the administrator and power-on passwords, and allow a power-on password  
to be changed by the user.  
See“Using passwords” on page 49 for more information.  
System Owners Name  
Select this choice to specify a system owner's name, which will display during  
POST. You can remove or change the name only from the System Security  
menu. You can use any combination of up to 16 characters for the system  
owner's name.  
Start Options  
Select this choice to view or change the start options. This choice appears only on  
the full Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu. Start options take effect when  
you start the server.  
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.  
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also  
can enable the server to run without a diskette drive, monitor, or keyboard.  
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the device from which the  
operating system loads. For example, you can define a startup sequence that  
checks for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks the hard disk  
drive in bay 1, and then checks a network adapter.  
Configuring the server 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You also can select which PCI SCSI adapter is given boot precedence. The first  
drive that is attached to the selected adapter will be assigned drive number 80L  
and the operating system will start from that drive. The default for boot  
precedence is Disabled. The range of choices depends upon the number of PCI  
SCSI adapters installed in the server.  
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for changes in the master boot  
record at startup. You also can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the  
quick mode.  
Advanced Setup  
Select this choice to change values for advanced hardware features, such as cache  
control, and PCI configuration. This choice appears only on the full  
Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu.  
A warning message appears above the choices on this menu to alert you that the  
system might malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the  
instructions on the screen carefully.  
Processor Serial Number Access  
Select this choice to identify if the microprocessor serial number in the  
microprocessor is readable.  
Core Chipset Control  
Select this choice to modify settings that control features of the core chip set.  
Attention: Changes here must only be made by an IBM authorized service  
representative.  
Cache Control  
Select this choice to enable or disable the microprocessor cache. In addition,  
you can define the microprocessor cache type as write-back (WB) or write-  
through (WT). Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum system  
performance.  
PCI Slot/Device Information  
Select this choice to view and identify system resources used by PCI devices.  
PCI devices automatically communicate with the server configuration  
information. This usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device.  
Attention: You must use the menu selections to save custom settings for the  
PCI Slot/ Device Information choice. The save, restore and load default  
settings choices on the main menu of the Configuration/ Setup Utility do not  
save the PCI Slot/ Device Information settings.  
After making changes, select:  
Save and exit the PCI Utility to save the changes and return to the  
Advanced Setup choice.  
Exit the PCI Utility without saving changes to ignore the changes,  
restore the previous settings, and return to the Advanced Setup choice.  
PCI Device Control allows you to enable or disable the integrated SCSI,  
video, and Ethernet controllers. You can also enable or disable PCI slots from  
this menu.  
The default setting is Enable for all the controllers and PCI slots. If you  
select Disable, the system will not configure the disabled device and the  
operating system will not see the device. (This is equivalent to  
unplugging the device.)  
If the on-board SCSI controller is disabled and no other controller and  
mass storage device are installed, operating system startup cannot occur.  
48 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the video controller is disabled and no video adapter is installed, the  
server will have no video capability. However, turning the server off and  
on three times without completing POST results in a default startup that  
enables video again.  
Memory Settings  
Select this choice to manually disable or enable a bank of memory.  
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the  
server can automatically disable the failing memory bank and continue  
operating with reduced memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually  
enable the memory bank after the problem is corrected. Select Memory  
Settings from the Advanced Setup menu, use the arrow keys to highlight the  
bank that you want to enable; then, use the arrow keys to select Enable.  
System Service Processor Settings  
Select this choice to enable or disable power supply redundancy monitoring.  
Event/Error Logs  
Select this choice to view or clear error logs.  
— Select Clear error logs to clear the error or event log.  
— Select POST Error Log to view the three most recent error codes and  
messages that the system generated during POST.  
— Select System Event/Error Log to view the system event/ error log. The  
system event/ error log contains all the system error and warning messages  
that the system has generated. You can use the arrow keys to move between  
pages in the system event/ error log.  
Save Settings  
Select this choice to save the customized settings.  
Restore Settings  
Select this choice to delete the changes and restore the previous settings.  
Load Default Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes and restore the factory settings.  
Exit Setup  
If you have made any changes, the program will prompt you to save the changes  
or exit without saving the changes.  
Using passwords  
The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration/ Setup Utility  
menu. After you select this choice, you can implement two levels of protection:  
power-on password and administrator password.  
Power-on password  
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the unattended-start mode. This  
locks the keyboard and mouse, but allows the server to start the operating system.  
The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you enter the correct password.  
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for the  
power-on password. Keep a record of the password in a secure place. If you forget  
the power-on password, you can regain access to the server through one of the  
following methods:  
Configuring the server 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
If an administrator password is set, enter the administrator password at the  
power-on prompt. Start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program and change the  
power-on password.  
Change the position of the password override switch as described in “Setting the  
password override switch:.  
Remove the battery and then install the battery.  
Setting the password override switch:: When a power-on password is set, POST  
does not complete until you enter the password. If you forget the power-on password,  
you can regain access to the server through either of the following methods:  
Enter the administrator password at the power-on prompt, if an administrator  
password has been set. Start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program and  
change the power-on password. See “Power-on password” on page 49  
Change the position of the jumper on J48 to bypass the power-on password check.  
You can then start the Configuration/ Setup Utility program and change the  
the location of J48.  
Administrator password  
Select this choice to set an administrator password. The administrator password  
provides access to all choices on the Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu. You can  
set, change, or delete both the administrator and power-on passwords, and allow a  
power-on password to be changed by the user.  
Attention: If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be  
overridden or removed. You must replace the I/ O Legacy board.  
The following table provides a summary of the password features.  
Table 6. Power-on and administrator password features.  
Ty pe of p a s swo r d  
R es u lt s  
Power-on password  
Enter the password to complete the system startup.  
All choices are available on the Configuration/ Setup Utility  
main menu.  
Administrator  
password  
No password is required to start the system.  
Enter the password to access the Configuration/ Setup Utility  
program.  
All choices are available on the Configuration/ Setup Utility  
main menu.  
Administrator and  
power-on password  
You can enter either password to complete the system startup.  
The administrator password provides access to all choices on  
the Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu. You can set,  
change, or delete both the administrator and power-on  
passwords, and allow a power-on password to be changed by  
the user.  
The power-on password provides access to a limited set of  
choices on the Configuration/ Setup Utility main menu. This  
limited access might include changing or deleting the power-  
on password.  
50 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the SCSISelect utility program  
SCSISelect is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program that you can use  
to:  
View the default SCSI IDs  
Locate and correct configuration conflicts  
Perform a low-level format on a SCSI hard disk  
The following sections provide the instructions needed to start the SCSISelect Utility  
and descriptions of the menu choices available.  
Note: If the server has a RAID adapter installed, use the configuration method  
supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI settings for RAID  
attached devices.  
Starting the SCSISelect utility program  
To start the SCSISelect utility program:  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the <<< Press <CTRL><A> for SCSISelect™ Utility! >>>prompt appears,  
press Ctrl+A.  
Note: If an administrator password has been set, a prompt appears asking you to  
enter the password to start the SCSISelect Utility program.  
3. When prompted, select either channel A (external) or channel B (internal).  
4. Use the arrow keys to select a choice from the menu.  
Press Esc to return to the previous menu.  
Press the F5 key to switch between color and monochrome modes (if the  
monitor permits).  
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the settings of the selected items;  
then, press Enter.  
Choices available from the SCSISelect menu  
The following choices appear on the SCSISelect Utility menu:  
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings  
Select this choice to view or change the SCSI controller settings. To reset the SCSI  
controller to its default values, press F6; then, follow the instructions that appear  
on the screen.  
You can view or change the following controller settings:  
Host Adapter SCSI ID  
Select this choice to view the SCSI controller ID, normally 7.  
SCSI Parity Checking  
Select this choice to view the assigned value of Enabled.  
Host Adapter SCSI Termination  
Select this choice to view the assigned value of Automatic.  
Boot Device Options  
Select this choice to configure startable device parameters. Before you can  
make updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you  
want to configure.  
Configuring the server 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SCSI Device Configuration  
Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters. Before you can make  
updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to  
configure.  
Note: The Maximum Sync Transfer Rate represents the transfer rate for Ultra  
SCSI devices.  
The transfer rate for Ultra-3 SCSI LVD devices is 160.0  
The transfer rate for Ultra-2 SCSI LVD devices is 80.0  
The transfer rate for Fast SCSI devices is 20.0  
Advanced Configuration Options  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration  
options. These options include enabling support for large hard disk drives  
and support for drives with UltraSCSI speeds.  
SCSI Disk Utilities  
Select this choice to view the SCSI IDs that are assigned to each device or to  
format a SCSI device.  
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list. Read the screens carefully  
before making a selection.  
Note: If you press Ctrl+A before the selected drives are ready, an Unexpected  
SCSI Command Failure screen might appear. Restart the server and watch  
the SCSISelect messages as each drive spins up. After the drive that you  
want to view or format spins up, press Ctrl+A.  
Format Disk  
Attention: The Low-Level Format program erases all data and programs.  
Select this choice to perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive. Depending  
on the hard disk drive capacity, the Low-Level Format program could take up to  
two hours.  
Use the Low-Level Format program:  
— When you are installing software that requires a low-level format  
— When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to  
run the Low-Level Format program on the hard disk drive  
— As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive  
Note: If the server has a PCI RAID adapter installed, refer to the RAID adapter  
documentation for instructions for performing low-level formats on hard  
disk drives attached to the adapter.  
To start the Low-Level Format program:  
1. If the hard disk is working, make a backup copy of all the files and programs  
on the hard disk drive. (See the operating system information for  
instructions.)  
2. Select Format Disk; then, follow the instructions on the screen.  
Note: Hard disks normally contain more tracks than their stated capacity (to  
allow for defective tracks). A message appears on the screen if the  
defect limit is reached. If this happens, replace the hard disk drive.  
52 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing options  
This chapter provides instructions to help you add options to the server.  
Note: The illustrations in this book are similar to the server; details might vary.  
Major components of the xSeries 250  
The orange color on components and labels in your server identifies hot-swap or hot-  
plug components. This means that you can install or remove the components while  
the system is running, provided that your system is configured to support this  
function. For complete information about installing or removing a hot-swap or hot-  
plug component, see the information provided in the detailed procedures in this  
document.  
The blue color on components and labels indicates touch points where a component  
can be gripped, a latch moved, and so on.  
Power backplane  
Shuttle  
SCSI backplane  
Media-bay bezel  
Power supply  
Removable-media  
Hot-swap  
drive  
Filler Panel  
Fan assembly #1  
drive  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Terminator card  
Shuttle  
cover  
Memory  
module  
Memory board  
VRM  
Fan  
assembly  
#2  
Fan  
assembly  
#3  
Shuttle  
Microprocessor  
I/O board  
Fan  
assembly  
#4  
Component locations  
This section provides illustrations of the I/ O board, processor board, and memory  
board component locations.  
I/O board component locations  
The following illustration shows the location of the input/ output (I/ O) connectors on  
the I/ O board.  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
54 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Power  
backplane  
Processor  
board  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Video port  
USB 1 and  
USB 2 port  
Ethernet port  
Serial  
port A  
Management  
port  
Parallel port  
Serial  
port B  
ASM  
interconnect  
SCSI  
external  
Processor board component locations  
The following illustration shows the location of the LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on  
the processor board.  
Processor board LEDs  
The following illustration shows the location of the LEDs.  
Installing options 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VRM 1 error LED  
R6  
Microprocessor 1  
(C  
)
R9  
error LED (C)  
Microprocessor 2  
VRM 2 error LED  
R7  
R3  
error LED (C)  
(C  
)
VRM 3 error LED  
R5  
Microprocessor 3  
(C  
)
R8  
error LED (C)  
Microprocessor 4  
VRM 4 error LED  
R4  
error LED (C)  
R10  
(C  
)
PCI slot LEDs  
Battery  
Processor board connectors  
The following illustration shows the connectors.  
Microprocessor 1  
Connector (J2)  
VRM 1 Connector  
VRM 2 Connector  
Microprocessor 2  
Connector (J3)  
Microprocessor 3  
Connector (J4)  
VRM 3 Connector  
Reserved (J8 and J9)  
Microprocessor 4  
Connector (J5)  
VRM 4 Connector  
Memory board  
Connector  
PCI Slot 1 and 2  
(on PCI bus A)  
PCI Slot 3-6  
(on PCI bus B)  
Battery  
56 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Processor board jumpers  
The following illustration shows the jumpers.  
3.3 V standby  
power for slot 2  
(J20)  
Advanced  
System  
Management  
Processor reset  
jumper block  
(J59)  
Jumper block  
(J10-J16)  
Flash ROM page-  
swap jumper  
block (J56)  
Power-on  
control jumper  
block (J23)  
Power-on  
password  
override jumper  
block (J48)  
3.3 V standby  
power for slot 1  
(J47)  
Battery  
Microprocessor core-frequency  
selection jumper block (J13-J16)  
Reserved (J10)  
Reserved (J12)  
Reserved (J11)  
Memory board component locations  
The illustrations in this section show certain locations on the memory board.  
Memory board connectors  
The following illustration shows the location of the DIMM connectors on the memory  
board.  
Installing options 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connector 1(J1)  
Connector 2 (J2)  
Connector 3 (J3)  
Connector 4 (J4)  
Connector 5 (J5)  
Connector 6 (J6)  
Connector 7 (J7)  
Connector 8 (J8)  
Connector 9 (J9)  
Connector 10 (J10)  
Connector 11 (J11)  
Connector 12 (J12)  
Connector 13 (J13)  
Connector 14 (J14)  
Connector 15 (J15)  
Connector 16 (J16)  
Memory board LED locations  
The following illustration shows the location of the error LEDs on the memory board.  
DIMM 1 error  
LED (CR4)  
DIMM 9 error  
LED (CR13)  
DIMM 2 error  
LED (CR5)  
DIMM 10 error  
LED (CR12)  
DIMM 3 error  
LED (CR2)  
DIMM 11 error  
LED (CR15)  
DIMM 4 error  
LED (CR1)  
DIMM 12 error  
LED (CR16)  
DIMM 5 error  
LED (CR6)  
DIMM 13 error  
LED (CR11)  
DIMM 6 error  
LED (CR3)  
DIMM 14 error  
LED (CR14)  
DIMM 7 error  
LED (CR7)  
DIMM 15 error  
LED (CR10)  
DIMM 8 error  
LED (CR8)  
DIMM 16 error  
LED (CR9)  
Before you begin  
Before you begin to install options in the server, read the following information:  
Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines provided in “Safety  
devices” on page 183. These guidelines will help you work safely while working  
with the server or options.  
You do not need to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power  
supplies, hot-swap drives, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug PCI adapters.  
The orange color on components and labels in the server identifies hot-swap or  
hot-plug components. This means that you can install or remove the component  
while the system is running, provided that the system is configured to support  
this function.  
The blue color on components and labels identifies touch points where you can  
grip a component, move a latch, and so on.  
Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical  
outlets for the server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.  
Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.  
58 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For a list of supported options for the Netfinity 7600, refer to  
http:/ / www.ibm.com/ pc/ us/ compat on the World Wide Web.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
The server is designed with features that make it highly available. These features are  
hot-add and hot-plug devices. Hot-plug devices allow you to replace the device  
without turning off the server. Hot-add devices allow you to add an identical device  
without turning off the server. In the past you would need to turn off the server and  
disconnect power to perform these operations. With the hot-plug features, you can  
remove the top cover of the server with the power on.  
The server supports hot plug, hot add, and hot swap devices and is designed to  
operate safely while turned on with the top cover removed. The server is designed to  
protect you and the server. Follow these guidelines when you work inside a server  
that is turned on:  
Avoid loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before  
working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the  
server.  
Do not allow your necktie to hang inside the server.  
Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist  
watches.  
Remove items from your shirt pocket (such as pens or pencils) that could fall into  
the server as you lean over it.  
Take care to avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hair pins, or  
screws, into the server.  
Removing the server top cover and bezel  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Removing the top cover  
Top cover  
Captive screws  
Installing options 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To remove the server top cover:  
1. Loosen the two thumbscrews on the back edge of the top cover.  
2. Slide the top cover slightly toward the rear of the server. Lift the cover off the  
server and set the cover aside.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the top cover before turning  
on the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time  
(over 30 minutes) with the top cover removed might damage server  
components.  
Removing the media-bay bezel  
Media-bay bezel  
To remove the media-bay bezel:  
1. Release the two tabs at the bottom edge of the media-bay bezel and pull the  
bottom of the bezel slightly away from the server.  
2. Pull the media-bay bezel down to release the two tabs at the top edge of the bezel.  
Store the bezel in a safe place.  
Removing the front trim bezel  
1∼  
Side tabs  
60 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2∼  
Bottom tabs  
1. Release the three tabs on the right side of the front trim bezel and release the two  
tabs on the left side of the bezel.  
2. Gently separate the bezel partly from the server.  
3. Release the two bottom tabs on the bezel and lift the bezel away from the server.  
Working with adapters  
You can install up to six PCI adapters in the expansion connectors on the processor  
board. All six of the slots are peripheral component interconnect (PCI) expansion  
slots.  
The server comes with an integrated super video graphics array (SVGA) video  
controller, which is not removable. If you want to disable this controller and use a  
video adapter instead, you can install a video adapter in an expansion slot. When you  
install a PCI video adapter, the server BIOS automatically disables the integrated  
video controller.  
Note: Video adapters are supported in all six PCI slots.  
The following illustration shows the location of the 64-bit PCI expansion slots on the  
processor board.  
Note: The illustrations in this book might differ slightly from your hardware.  
Non-hot-plug PCI slots  
1-2 (on PCI bus A)  
External Attention LEDs for  
hot-plug slots  
Hot-plug PCI slots  
3-6 (on PCI bus B)  
Internal Attention LEDs for  
hot-plug slots  
Power LEDs  
for hot-plug slots  
Adapter considerations  
Before you continue with the adapter-installation procedure:  
Installing options 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Review the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those  
instructions in addition to the instructions given in this chapter. If you need to  
change the switch or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that  
come with the adapter documentation.  
Slots 3 through 6 support 5.0V, 3.3V, and universal PCI adapters.  
Note: Universal PCI adapters support both 3.3V and 5.0V operation.  
Slots 1 and 2 support 3.3 V and universal non-hot-swap PCI adapters only.  
The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters.  
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI adapters that currently  
do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.  
The system scans PCI slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources; then the  
system starts (boots) the PCI devices in the following order: processor board  
devices, slots 1 and 2, and then slots 3 through 6.  
The performance of the PCI adapters depends on the types of adapters in the  
system.  
Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 3 through 6)  
Refer to the following illustration to install a hot-plug PCI adapter.  
Note: The illustrations in this book may be slightly different from your server.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Adapter  
retention latch  
Adapter retention latch  
Adapter  
Tab  
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:  
62 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attention: Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing the operating-  
system-defined procedure for disabling the hot-plug PCI slot that  
contains the adapter. Failure to do so might cause the system to lock up.  
Refer to the operating system documentation.  
1. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
2. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.  
Note: You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots 3-6 only.  
3. Disable the selected PCI slot from the operating system. (Refer to the  
documentation that comes with the operating system for information about  
disabling a hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off the power light for  
that PCI slot.  
Attention: Make sure the power light for the hot-plug PCI slot is off before you  
continue with the next step.  
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover:  
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch counterclockwise.  
b. Lift the tab covering the top of the expansion-slot cover and then remove the  
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for future use.  
c. Press on the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) as  
indicated by the arrow on the latch and lift it to the open position.  
Attention: You must install expansion-slot covers on all empty slots. This  
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and  
ensures proper cooling of system components.  
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with the adapter for any cabling  
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install the  
adapter.  
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.  
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the  
adapter. If you need to put down the adapter, place the adapter,  
component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.  
7. Install the adapter:  
a. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it with  
the expansion slot on the processor board.  
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.  
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is  
completely and correctly seated in the processor-board connector.  
Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the processor board  
or the adapter.  
c. Lower the tab over the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention  
latch clockwise until it snaps into place.  
d. Lower the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) over the top  
of the adapter and press on the indentation on the latch until the latch snaps  
into place.  
8. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.  
9. Enable the PCI slot from the operating system. (Refer to the documentation that  
comes with the operating system for information about enabling a hot-plug PCI  
slot.) Make sure that the power light for the hot-plug PCI slot is on.  
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go  
Installing options 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a non-hot-plug PCI adapter (slots 1 and 2)  
The following illustration shows how to install a non-hot-plug PCI adapter.  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Adapter  
retention latch  
Adapter retention latch  
Adapter  
Tab  
To install a non-hot-plug PCI adapter:  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid  
damage from static electricity.  
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cords.  
2. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
3. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.  
Note: PCI slots 1 and 2 support non-hot-plug PCI adapters only.  
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover:  
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch counterclockwise.  
b. Lift the tab covering the top of the expansion-slot cover and then remove the  
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for future use.  
c. Press on the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) as  
indicated by the arrow on the latch and lift it to the open position.  
Attention: You must install expansion-slot covers on all empty slots. This  
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and  
ensures proper cooling of system components.  
64 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling  
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install the  
adapter.  
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.  
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the  
adapter. If you need to put down the adapter, place the adapter, component-side  
up, on a flat, static-protective surface.  
7. Install the adapter:  
a. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it with  
the expansion slot on the processor board.  
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.  
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is  
completely and correctly seated in the expansion slot. Incomplete insertion  
might cause damage to the processor board or the adapter.  
c. Lower the tab over the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention  
latch clockwise until it snaps into place.  
d. Lower the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) over the top  
of the adapter and press on the indentation on the latch until the latch snaps  
into place.  
8. Connect any needed cables to the adapter and reconnect the power cords that you  
disconnected in step 1 on page 64.  
9. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing options 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cabling example for the ServeRAID adapter  
You can install an optional IBM ServeRAID™ adapter in your server to control the  
internal hot-swap hard-disk drives; that is, to enable you to configure the internal hot-  
swap hard disk drives into disk arrays. Refer to your ServeRAID adapter option  
documentation for additional information on:  
Installing a ServeRAID adapter in your server  
Connecting the SCSI cable to a ServeRAID adapter  
ServeRAID adapters and controllers  
Select the PCI slot where you want to install the ServeRAID adapter. Before you  
install the ServeRAID adapter, verify that it is compatible with the PCI slot that you  
selected. Some ServeRAID adapters are not compatible with PCI slots 1 and 2. See  
“Adapter considerations” on page 61 for additional information on PCI slots.  
The following procedure describes the cable routing that is necessary when you install  
a ServeRAID adapter. You can also cable a ServeRAID adapter to external hard disk  
drives.  
Notes:  
1. The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
2. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling  
instructions.  
3. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and  
options. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors. For  
example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled "HDD".  
To cable the ServeRAID adapter:  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
1. Determine the number of SCSI channels that you want to use on the ServeRAID  
adapter. If you are connecting to more than two SCSI channels, you might need to  
purchase additional SCSI cables. Consult your IBM marketing representative or  
reseller for additional information on the number and types of cables that your  
server configuration requires.  
As shipped, your server comes with two SCSI cables attached to the SCSI  
backplane (see “LVD SCSI backplane” on page 72 for details):  
One end of the first SCSI cable is attached to the SCSI channel A connector on  
the SCSI backplane, and the other end is attached to the power backplane.  
One end of the second SCSI cable is attached to the SCSI channel B connector  
on the SCSI backplane. The other end of this cable is folded and restrained  
with a clamp.  
If you want to connect all of the hot-swap hard disk drives to one channel, you  
must install an optional SCSI repeater card as described in “SCSI repeater card  
2. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cords.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. If you have not yet installed the ServeRAID adapter, install it now. Depending on  
your server configuration, see the beginning of this section for instructions on  
installing a hot-plug or non-hot-plug adapter; then, return here. Otherwise,  
continue with the next step.  
66 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Disconnect the shuttle:  
a. Disengage the retaining levers by pressing inward.  
b. Move the retaining levers back to the unlocked position.  
Retaining lever  
(unlocked position)  
c. Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server until it stops.  
Note: It is not necessary to remove the shuttle from the server.  
6. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI connector on the power backplane.  
SCSI connector on  
power backplane  
Installing options 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Route one end of the SCSI cable through the cable retaining clips on the SCSI  
backplane.  
Handle  
Cable retaining  
clips  
Backplane  
Retention clips  
Guides  
SCSI channel  
A connector  
Power cable  
connector  
SCSI channel  
B connector  
Retention clips  
68 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Attach one end of the SCSI cable to the selected internal SCSI channel connector  
on the ServeRAID adapter. Make sure that the other end of the SCSI cable is  
attached to the appropriate channel connector on the SCSI backplane.  
Attention: When you route the SCSI cable, do the following:  
Do not block the ventilated space in front of the fan assembly.  
Do not place the SCSI cable fold on top of the fan assembly.  
Do not route the SCSI cable over the memory board assembly.  
The following illustration shows how to route one SCSI cable to the ServeRAID  
adapter.  
ServeRAID adapter  
SCSI cable  
SCSI connector on  
power backplane  
SCSI connector on  
hard disk drive  
backplane  
Installing options 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. If you are connecting to two SCSI channels, repeat step 7 on page 68 and step 8 on  
page 69 for the second channel on the SCSI backplane. The following illustration  
is a top-down view that shows how to route two SCSI cables to the ServeRAID  
adapter in PCI slot 1.  
SCSI cables  
Cable  
retaining  
clip  
SCSI  
connectors  
on ServeRAID  
adapter  
70 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Connect the shuttle.  
Retaining lever  
(unlocked position)  
Retaining lever  
(locked position)  
Pin  
Pin  
a. Align the two shuttle pins with the holes on each side of the rear of the  
chassis, and disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.  
b. Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server and secure the  
retaining levers in the horizontal (locked) position.  
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing options 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LVD SCSI backplane  
The server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive  
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to  
operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are  
known as hot-swap drives. The hot-swap drives are attached to a hot-swap hard disk  
drive backplane. The backplane is a printed circuit board behind the drive bays. For  
more information on drive bays and drive installation, see “Installing internal drives”  
As shipped, the LVD SCSI hot-swap hard disk drive backplane supports a split, dual-  
channel configuration. You can install a maximum of 10 slim-high, hot-swap hard  
disk drives. You can attach five drives to each half of the backplane. These drives must  
be low voltage differential (LVD) hard disk drives that operate at 160 MB per second  
or lower.  
You can configure the channels on the SCSI backplane in one of two ways:  
You can configure each SCSI channel (bus) independently. This is the standard  
backplane configuration. In this configuration:  
— The hard disk drives in the upper half of the backplane are attached to  
channel A through a SCSI cable that comes attached to the SCSI backplane.  
— The hard disk drives in the lower half of the backplane are attached to  
channel B through a second optional SCSI cable. One end of this second SCSI  
cable comes attached to the SCSI channel B connector on the backplane. The  
other end of this cable is folded and restrained with a clamp.  
When you are installing hot-swap hard disk drives in the standard backplane  
configuration, attach the first five to channel A; then, attach the remainder to  
channel B. Refer to the illustration in this section for the SCSI channel connector  
locations.  
You can choose to configure the SCSI backplane as a single 10-drive SCSI channel.  
To do this, you must install an optional SCSI repeater card as described in “SCSI  
Notes:  
1. The LVD SCSI backplane is also known as the SCSI backplane or the hot-swap  
hard disk drive backplane.  
2. Table 14 on page 98 lists the SCSI identifiers (IDs) for the LVD SCSI backplane and  
the hot-swap hard disk drives that are attached to SCSI channels A and B.  
3. Carefully route all cables so that they do not become damaged.  
4. Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and  
options. Use these identifiers to attach the cables to the correct connectors. For  
example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled "HDD".  
5. For information on cabling options and using the LVD SCSI backplane, refer to  
the documentation that comes with the option kit.  
6. For additional information on cabling the ServeRAID adapter, see “Cabling  
7. The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
LVD SCSI backplane removal  
72 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following illustration shows the main SCSI backplane component locations.  
Handle  
Cable retaining  
clips  
Backplane  
Retention clips  
Guides  
SCSI channel  
A connector  
Power cable  
connector  
SCSI channel  
B connector  
Retention clips  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
To remove the LVD SCSI backplane, perform the following actions:  
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect all power cords and  
external cables; then, remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on  
2. If a ServeRAID adapter is installed in the server, disconnect the SCSI cable from  
3. Disconnect the shuttle:  
a. Disengage the retaining levers by pressing inward.  
b. Move the retaining levers back to the unlocked position.  
Installing options 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retaining lever  
(unlocked position)  
c. Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server until it stops.  
Note: It is not necessary to remove the shuttle from the server.  
4. Remove fan assembly 1 from the server (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page  
5. Disconnect the hot-swap hard disk drives from the corresponding SCSI backplane  
connectors; then, slide the drives forward.  
Note: It is not necessary to remove the drives from the server.  
74 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Remove the SCSI backplane from the server:  
a. Lift the SCSI backplane guides from the corresponding slots on the server;  
then, slide the SCSI backplane upward.  
b. Disconnect the power cable from the SCSI backplane.  
c. Disconnect the SCSI cables from the channel A and B connectors on the SCSI  
backplane.  
d. Lift the SCSI backplane from the server.  
7. To install the SCSI backplane, reverse the above steps, making sure that the SCSI  
backplane guides are aligned with the corresponding slots on the server.  
8. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
SCSI repeater card installation  
You must install an optional SCSI repeater card to connect all of your internal hot-  
swap hard disk drives to the same SCSI channel.  
The following illustration shows the rear connectors on the optional SCSI repeater  
card, as viewed from the rear of the server.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
SCSI repeater  
card cable  
connector  
SCSI cable  
connector  
Installing options 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To install a SCSI repeater card:  
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid  
damage from static electricity.  
1. Remove the LVD SCSI backplane (see “LVD SCSI backplane removal” on page  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the repeater card option to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the repeater card option from  
the package.  
Note: If necessary, refer to the documentation that comes with the repeater card  
option kit to assemble the repeater card option.  
3. Connect the repeater card option to the SCSI backplane:  
a. Align the corresponding connectors on the repeater card and the SCSI  
backplane. The corresponding screw holes on the repeater card and the SCSI  
backplane will automatically align.  
Backplane  
Retention clips  
SCSI repeater card  
screws  
b. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to connect the repeater card to the SCSI  
backplane with the two screws from the repeater card option kit.  
c. Secure the repeater card with the retention clips on the SCSI channel A  
connector on the SCSI backplane.  
4. A short SCSI cable comes with the repeater card option kit.  
a. Connect one end of this cable to the repeater card.  
b. Connect the other end of the cable to the SCSI channel B connector on the  
SCSI backplane.  
c. Secure both cable ends with the retention clips on the SCSI connectors.  
76 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI backplane  
SCSI repeater card  
SCSI cable to  
power backplane  
SCSI repeater  
card cable  
Installing options 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Reinstall the SCSI backplane in the server:  
a. Reconnect the power cable to the SCSI backplane.  
b. Align the SCSI backplane guides with the corresponding slots on the server.  
c. Slide the SCSI backplane into the server.  
d. Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the repeater card.  
SCSI  
backplane  
SCSI  
repeater  
card  
e. Make sure that the other end of the SCSI cable is attached to the power  
backplane located on the rear of the shuttle.  
SCSI connector on  
power backplane  
78 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Slide the hot-swap hard disk drives back into place in the drive bays. If you need  
to install additional hot-swap drives, do so now (see “Installing a hot-swap hard  
disk drive” on page 81). You can connect a maximum of 10 hard disk drives to the  
SCSI backplane.  
Note: After you connect these hard disk drives to the SCSI backplane, the  
backplane sets the SCSI IDs for the backplane and the hard disk drives.  
See “Setting SCSI IDs” on page 97 for additional information.  
7. Reinstall fan assembly 1 in the server.  
8. Reconnect the shuttle.  
Retaining lever  
(unlocked position)  
Retaining lever  
(locked position)  
Pin  
Pin  
a. Align the two shuttle pins with the holes on each side of the rear of the  
chassis, and disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.  
b. Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server, and secure the  
retaining levers in the horizontal (locked) position.  
9. If you disconnected the SCSI cable from the ServeRAID adapter in step 2 on page  
73, reconnect the SCSI cable to the adapter.  
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing internal drives  
If you add different types of drives, the system can read multiple types of media and  
store more data. Several types of drives are available, such as:  
Diskette  
Hard disk  
CD-ROM  
Tape  
Internal drives are installed in bays. Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB  
diskette drive and one IDE CD-ROM drive.  
Installing options 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5-inch diskette drive  
CD-ROM drive  
Media bays 1 and 2  
Hot-swap hard  
disk drive bay  
Your server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive  
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to  
operate the system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are  
known as hot-swap drives.  
Each hot-swap drive has two indicator lights on the front of the server. If the amber  
hard-disk status light for a drive is lit continuously, that individual drive is faulty and  
needs to be replaced. When the hard-disk status light indicates a drive fault, you can  
replace a hot-swap drive without turning off the server.  
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must be mounted in a hot-swap-drive  
tray. The drive must have a single connector attachment (SCA) connector. Hot-swap-  
drive trays come with hot-swap drives.  
Internal drive bays  
Internal drives are installed in bays.  
Your server comes with one CD-ROM drive and one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette  
drive.  
The left front bays support 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media drives. Any  
two adjacent 5.25-inch, half-high bays can be converted to a single full-high bay.  
Note: The server EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having the left  
front bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler  
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not replace it  
with another.  
You cannot install hard disk drives in the left front bays. You can install hot-swap  
hard disk drives only in the hot-swap hard disk drive bays on the right front side  
of the server.  
If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector in one of the left front bays,  
you will need a 68-to-50-pin converter (option number 32G3925).  
Your server supports ten 1-inch (26 mm) slim-high, 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk  
drives in the hot-swap bays.  
80 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The hot-swap bays connect to the LVD SCSI backplane. Your server comes with  
two SCSI channels on this backplane. For more information, see LVD SCSI  
Some drives have a special interface called small computer system interface, or SCSI.  
Using this interface, you can attach multiple drives to a single SCSI controller.  
Notes:  
1. Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices, such as  
scanners and printers.  
2. If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices, you must follow the  
instructions in “Connecting external options” on page 93, in addition to the  
instructions in this section.  
A 16-bit (wide) low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI cable connects the hard disk drive  
backplane to the ServeRaid adapter located in a PCI slot on the processor board. An  
additional 16-bit, two-drop SCSI cable comes with the server. It is located in the  
bottom of the server media bay and is restrained with a cable clamp.  
If you want to install SCSI devices in the removable media bays:  
1. Locate the internal SCSI connector on the power backplane.  
2. Use the 16-bit two-drop SCSI cable located in the bottom of the server media bay.  
3. Connect the SCSI device(s) in the removable media bay to the internal SCSI  
connector on the power backplane.  
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
Refer to the following illustration when installing a hot-swap drive.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Gap filler  
Gap filler  
Slim  
filler panel  
Drive tray handle  
(in open position)  
Note: You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in these bays.  
Installing options 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To install a drive in a hot-swap bay:  
1. Remove the filler panel from one of the empty hot-swap bays by inserting your  
finger into the depression at the left side of the filler panel and pulling it away  
from the server.  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for  
more than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed  
for each bay.  
2. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:  
a. If there is a small gap above or below the drive, separate the slim filler from  
the filler panel, and insert it in the gap.  
Note: A drive placement guide is located on the inside edge of the bezel. The  
drive placement guide indicates the placement for slim-high drives.  
The guide also shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.  
b. Ensure the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).  
c. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.  
d. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.  
e. Push the tray handle to the closed (locked) position.  
f. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drive  
is operating properly.  
If the amber hard-disk status light for a drive is lit continuously, that  
individual drive is faulty and needs to be replaced. If the green hard-disk  
activity light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.  
Note: If the server has an optional RAID controller installed, you must configure  
the disk arrays after installing hard disk drives. Refer to “Using IBM  
ServeRAID” on page 117 for information.  
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive  
Refer to the following illustrations when installing a 5.25-inch removable media drive.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Slide rails for  
use with a tape drive  
Filler panel with  
EMI sheild  
Slide rails  
Drive  
82 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive. Also, check the instructions  
that come with the drive to see if you need to set any switches or jumpers on the  
drive.  
To install a removable-media drive in one of the left front bays:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect all external cables and  
remove the top cover.  
2. Remove the media-bay bezel.  
3. Remove the filler panel from the bay opening. Keep the filler panel nearby.  
Note: The server EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having the left  
front bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler  
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not replace it  
with another.  
4. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal  
surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the bag and place it on a static-  
protective surface.  
5. Remove the snap-on slide rails from the filler panel and snap the rails on the  
drive. Store the filler panel for later use.  
Note: Slide rails for installing a tape drive are attached with screws. Use the  
screws to attach the rails to the side of the tape drive.  
6. Align the slide rails on the drive with the guide rails in the bay; then, slide the  
drive into the bay until it snaps into place.  
Note: If you are installing a tape drive, use the screws that are shipped next to  
the tape drive rails to attach the tape drive to the front of the chassis.  
7. Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108).  
8. If you are installing a SCSI device, go to step 9.. If you are installing an IDE  
device, go to step 10..  
9. Install the two-drop SCSI cable:  
a. Locate the two-drop SCSI cable. The two-drop SCSI cable is located in the  
bottom of the server between the open bays and the power supply area. It is  
folded and restrained with a cable clamp.  
b. Connect one of the connectors on the two-drop SCSI cable to the back of the  
drive. Go to step 11..  
c. Connect the other end of the two-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on  
the power backplane.  
d. Go to step 11..  
10. To install an IDE device, such as a CD-ROM or a DVD-ROM, use the two-drop  
IDE cable that comes with the option.  
a. Remove the cable that connects the CD-ROM to the IDE connector on the  
power backplane.  
b. Using the two-drop cable that came with the IDE option, connect the CD-  
ROM and IDE device you are installing to the IDE connector on the power  
backplane.  
c. Set the jumper on the back of the new IDE option as secondary.  
11. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive. Power cables for removable-  
media drives come installed in the server. The connectors are keyed and can be  
inserted only one way.  
12. If you are installing another 5.25-inch drive, do so now. Otherwise, continue with  
step 13 on page 84.  
Installing options 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. Connect the shuttle.  
a. Slide the shuttle back into the server  
b. Disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.  
c. Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server.  
d. Secure the retaining levers in the horizontal position.  
14. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing memory-module kits  
Before you continue with the memory-installation procedure, review the following:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
All the DIMMs installed in each set must be the same size and speed, but all the  
sets do not have to contain DIMMs of the same size and speed.  
The memory board contains 16 DIMM connectors and supports 4-way memory  
interleaving.  
Install only 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered DIMMs. Only 100 MHz, 72-bit,  
registered, synchronous, error correcting code (ECC), SDRAM configuration  
DIMM memory is supported for the 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB (when  
available) DIMMs.  
If you install 4 GB of memory, some of the memory is reserved for system  
resources. The amount reserved for system resources depends on the  
configuration of the server.  
If you install 16 GB of memory, the Configuration/ Setup Utility will display the  
memory that is usable by the network operating system. This amount of memory  
might differ from the amount of memory you have installed.  
Installing or removing DIMMs changes the configuration information in the  
server. Therefore, after installing or removing a DIMM, you must save the new  
configuration information in the Configuration/ Setup Utility program. Refer to  
information.  
Install the DIMMs in the order provided in Table 7.  
For the locations of the DIMM connectors, see “Memory board component  
Set of 4 DIMMs  
First set (shipped as standard)  
Install DIMMs in these connectors:  
J1, J5, J9, J13  
2nd set  
3rd set  
4th set  
J2, J6, J10, J14  
J3, J7, J11, J15  
J4, J8, J12, J16  
Table 7. DIMM installation order.  
Refer to the following illustration when installing memory.  
84 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pop rivets  
Processor housing  
cover  
DIMM  
Memory board  
To install a memory module:  
Before you begin:  
Read the documentation that comes with your option.  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect external cables and  
power cords and remove the top cover.  
3. Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover  
from the processor housing.  
4. Remove the memory board assembly:  
a. Lift up on the memory board assembly and remove it from the server.  
b. Place the memory board assembly on a static-protective surface, such as the  
static-protective package in which the option came.  
5. Locate the DIMM connectors on the memory board. Determine the DIMM  
connectors into which you will install the DIMMs. (See the notes at the beginning  
of this procedure.)  
6. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM option to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.  
Note: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors,  
handle the clips gently.  
Installing options 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. To install the DIMMs, repeat the following steps for each DIMM that you install.  
a. Turn the DIMM so that the pins align correctly with the DIMM connector.  
b. Insert the DIMM by pressing the DIMM straight into the connector. Be sure  
that the retaining clips snap into the closed position.  
8. Install the memory board assembly:  
a. Hold the memory board assembly and align it over the memory board  
connector.  
b. Insert the memory board assembly into the connector.  
9. Install the processor housing cover and push the two pop rivets down to secure  
the cover.  
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing a microprocessor kit  
The server comes with one microprocessor installed on the processor board. If you  
install an additional microprocessor kit, the server can operate as a symmetric  
multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating systems and application  
programs can distribute the processing load among the microprocessors.  
Microprocess  
Core/bus  
or speed  
(MHz)  
J13 Jumper  
J14 Jumper  
J15 Jumper  
J16 Jumper  
fraction  
700  
900  
7.0  
Pins 2 and 3  
Pins 1 and 2  
Pins 1 and 2  
Pins 2 and 3  
Automatic  
setting  
Due to the automatic speed setting, no jumper settings are  
required.  
Table 8. Microprocessor core frequency selection.  
Notes:  
1. Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so  
that you can determine whether you need to update the server basic  
input/ output system (BIOS) code. The latest level of BIOS code for the server is  
available through the World Wide Web. Go to  
http:/ / www.ibm.com/ pc/ support/ , select IBM Servers, and make the selections  
for your server.  
2. Obtain an SMP-capable operating system (optional). For a list of supported  
operating systems, see http:/ / www.ibm.com/ pc/ us/ compat/ on the World  
Wide Web.  
Attention: To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation when you  
install a new or an additional microprocessor, use microprocessors that have the  
same cache size and type, and the same clock speed. Microprocessor internal and  
external clock frequencies must be identical.  
3. To order additional microprocessor options, contact your IBM reseller or IBM  
marketing representative.  
4. If you replace the microprocessor in the server with a microprocessor that  
operates at a different speed, be sure to set the microprocessor core-frequency-  
selection jumpers correctly. See Table 8.  
5. Your server comes standard with one microprocessor installed. The  
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector J2 and is the startup  
(boot) processor. A microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J3 is  
processor 2; a microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J4 is  
86 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
processor 3; a microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J5 is  
processor 4. If more than one microprocessor is installed, the highest numbered  
processor is the one the server will start from. The lower numbered  
microprocessors are used as application processors.  
The following table and the label on the inside of the top cover of the server show the  
order in which additional microprocessors and voltage regulator modules (VRMs)  
must be installed.  
Table 9. Microprocessor and VRM installation order.  
Note: "T" indicates an installed terminator card; "X" indicates an installed microprocessor or VRM. A terminator card  
must be installed in each microprocessor connector that does not contain a microprocessor.  
One microprocessor installed  
Microprocessor connectors  
VRM connectors  
J2 (P1)  
X
J3 (P2)  
T
J4 (P3)  
T
J5 (P4)  
T
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)  
X
Two microprocessors installed  
Microprocessor connectors  
VRM connectors  
J2 (P1)  
X
J3 (P2)  
X
J4 (P3)  
T
J5 (P4)  
T
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)  
X
X
Three microprocessors installed  
Microprocessor connectors  
VRM connectors  
J2 (P1)  
X
J3 (P2)  
X
J4 (P3)  
X
J5 (P4)  
T
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)  
X
X
X
Four microprocessors installed  
Microprocessor connectors  
VRM connectors  
J2 (P1)  
X
J3 (P2)  
X
J4 (P3)  
X
J5 (P4)  
X
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)  
X
X
X
X
To install an additional microprocessor kit:  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect all external cables and  
power cords and remove the top cover.  
Pop rivets  
Processor housing  
cover  
VRM  
Terminator card  
Installing options 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover  
from the processor housing.  
4. Determine the slots where you will install the microprocessor and VRM.  
5. Remove the terminator card from the microprocessor connector.  
6. Install the microprocessor:  
a. Touch the static-protective package containing the new microprocessor to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor from  
the package.  
b. Hold the microprocessor by the open latches, and center the microprocessor  
over the microprocessor connector.  
Attention: Make sure the microprocessor is oriented and aligned correctly  
before you try to close the latches.  
c. Carefully close the latches to seat the microprocessor in the connector.  
d. Store the terminator card in a safe place in the static-protective package that  
the new microprocessor comes in; you will need to install it again if you ever  
remove the microprocessor.  
7. Install the voltage regulator module (VRM):  
a. Center the VRM over the connector. Make sure that the VRM is oriented and  
aligned correctly.  
Note: If you remove the microprocessor later, remember to install the  
terminator card in the appropriate microprocessor connector and to  
remove the VRM for that microprocessor.  
b. Carefully close the latches to seat the VRM in the connector.  
8. Install the processor housing cover and push down on the two pop rivets.  
9. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing a hot-swap power supply  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label  
attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component  
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these  
88 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service  
technician.  
Before you continue with the power supply-installation procedure, review the  
following.  
Notes:  
1. During normal operation, each power supply bay must have either a power  
supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.  
2. Before you install a power supply in the right-most power supply bay, you must  
disconnect the cable-management arm. You can connect the cable-management  
arm after installing the power supply.  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Refer to the following illustration to install a hot-swap power supply.  
Handle  
Filler panel  
DC power light  
AC power light  
To install an additional power supply:  
1. Remove the filler panel.  
2. Place the handle on the power supply in the open position.  
3. Slide the power supply into the chassis and close the handle.  
4. Plug one end of the power cord into the power supply; then, plug the other end of  
the cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
5. Verify that the DC Power light and the AC Power light on the power supply are  
lit, indicating that the power supply is operating properly.  
Installing options 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION:  
If you install a strain-relief bracket option over the end of the power cord that is  
connected to the device, you must connect the other end of the power cord to an  
easily accessible power source.  
Replacing a hot-swap fan  
Before you begin:  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Read the documentation that comes with the option.  
Refer to the following illustration to replace a hot-swap fan.  
1
2
6
5
4
3
1∼  
2∼  
3∼  
4∼  
5∼  
6∼  
Latch  
Hot-swap fan assembly 2  
Hot-swap fan assembly 4  
Pop rivet  
Hot-swap fan assembly 3  
Hot-swap fan assembly 1  
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:  
1. If you are replacing fan assembly 1, 2, or 3:  
a. Remove the top cover.  
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, keep the cover removed for no  
more than 30 minutes during this procedure.  
b. Press the fan release latch and lift the fan assembly out of the server.  
90 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server. The latch will snap into  
place and secure the fan in the server.  
d. Replace the top cover  
2. If you are replacing fan assembly 4:  
a. Pull out on the orange pop rivet on the rear fan bracket; then, lift the fan  
assembly up and out of the hinge cutouts.  
b. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server. (Make sure the fan  
assembly fits correctly into the hinge cutouts on the rear of the shuttle.)  
c. When you have the fan assembly properly seated, push on the pop rivet until  
it clicks into place.  
Completing the installation  
To complete the installation, you must reinstall the front trim bezel, reinstall the  
media bay bezel, reinstall the top cover, reconnect all the cables that you disconnected,  
and for certain options, run the Configuration/ Setup Utility program. Follow the  
instructions in this section.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, install the top cover before turning on the  
server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30  
minutes) with the top cover removed might damage server components.  
Installing the front trim bezel  
1∼  
2∼  
Side tabs  
Bottom tabs  
1. Align the two bottom tabs with the notches on the bottom front of the server.  
2. Align the side tabs with the notches on the sides of the server.  
3. Gently press the bezel into place.  
Installing the media-bay bezel  
Refer to the following illustration to install the media-bay bezel.  
Installing options 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
1∼  
Media-bay bezel  
To install the media-bay bezel:  
1. Insert the two tabs on the top of the media-bay bezel into the matching holes on  
the server chassis.  
2. Push the bottom of the media-bay bezel toward the server until the two tabs at the  
bottom of the bezel snap into place.  
Installing the top cover  
1
2
1∼  
2∼  
Top cover  
Captive screws  
To install the server top cover:  
1. Before installing the cover, check that all cables, adapters, and other components  
are installed and seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts  
inside the server.  
2. Lower the cover with the rear edge of the cover about 25 mm (1 inch) back from  
the rear edge of the server.  
3. Slide the cover forward.  
4. Tighten the two captive screws on the back edge of the cover.  
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the cables;  
then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.  
Note: If necessary, see “Cabling the server” on page 104 for connector locations.  
92 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reconfiguring the server  
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove an internal option  
or an external SCSI device, you might see a message telling you that the configuration  
has changed. Run the Configuration/ Setup Utility program to save the new  
Some options have device drivers that you need to install. Refer to the documentation  
that comes with the option for information about installing any required device  
drivers.  
If you have installed a new microprocessor, you might want to upgrade the operating  
system to support symmetric multiprocessing (SMP).  
Run the Configuration/ Setup Utility program to save the new configuration  
If you have installed or removed a hard disk drive, refer to “Using IBM ServeRAID”  
on page 117 for information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.  
Connecting external options  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58. Also, read the  
documentation that comes with the options.  
To attach an external device:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation and  
to connect it to the server.  
Input/output ports  
This section provides information about the input/ output (I/ O) ports on the rear of  
the server. These ports include the following:  
One parallel port  
One video port  
One keyboard port  
One auxiliary-device port (mouse)  
One dual-channel Ultra-2 (LVD) SCSI port  
Two serial ports  
Two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports  
One Ethernet port  
Three communication ports dedicated to the Advanced System Management  
processor  
Refer to the following illustration for the location of input and output connectors.  
Installing options 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Systems  
Management Interconnect knockout  
Parallel  
Serial A  
System management  
Ethernet  
Serial B  
ASM Interconnect  
port A  
USB1  
USB2  
ASM Interconnect  
port B  
Video  
Keyboard  
Ultra2 SCSI  
Mouse  
Parallel port  
The server has one parallel port. This port supports three standard Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1284 modes of operation: Standard Parallel  
Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and Extended Capability Port (ECP).  
Viewing or changing the parallel-port  
assignments  
You can use the built-in Configuration/ Setup Utility program to configure the  
parallel port as bidirectional; that is, so that data can be both read from and written to  
a device. In bidirectional mode, the server supports the ECP and EPP modes.  
To view or change the parallel-port assignment:  
1. Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.  
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setupappears, press F1.  
Note: The Devices and I/ O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration  
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must enter the  
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.  
3. From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.  
4. Select the parallel port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the settings  
available.  
Note: When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, use an IEEE 1284-  
compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not exceed 3  
meters (9.8 feet).  
5. Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the Configuration/ Setup  
Utility main menu.  
94 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Parallel port connector  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 25-pin, female D-shell  
parallel-port connector on the rear of the server.  
1
13  
25  
14  
Table 10. Parallel-port connector pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
1
I/O  
O
SPP/ECP Signal  
-STROBE  
EPP Signal  
-WRITE  
Data 0  
Data 1  
Data 2  
Data 3  
Data 4  
Data 5  
Data 6  
Data 7  
-ACK  
2
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I/ O  
I
Data 0  
3
Data 1  
4
Data 2  
5
Data 3  
6
Data 4  
7
Data 5  
8
Data 6  
9
Data 7  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
-ACK  
I
BUSY  
-WAIT  
I
PE (paper end)  
SLCT (select)  
-AUTO FD (feed)  
-ERROR  
-INIT  
PE (paper end)  
SLCT (select)  
-AUTO FD  
-ERROR  
-INIT  
I
O
I
O
O
-SLCT IN  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
-SLCT IN  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Ground  
Video port  
Your server comes with an integrated super video graphics array (SVGA) video  
controller. This controller is not removable, but you can disable it by installing a PCI  
video adapter.  
Note: If you install a PCI video adapter, the server BIOS will automatically disable  
the integrated video controller.  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 15-pin analog video  
connector on the rear of the server.  
Installing options 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
1
15  
11  
Table 11. Video-port connector pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Red  
2
Green or monochrome  
3
Blue  
4
Monitor ID bit 2  
5
Ground  
6
Ground  
7
Ground  
8
Ground  
9
+5 V dc  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Ground  
Monitor ID bit 0  
DDC SDA  
Horizontal synchronization (Hsynch)  
Vertical synchronization (Vsynch)  
DDC SCL  
Keyboard port  
There is one keyboard port connector on the rear of the server.  
Note: If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the  
USB ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test (POST).  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the keyboard connector  
on the rear of the server.  
6
4
5
3
1
2
Table 12. Keyboard connector pin-number assignments .  
Pin  
1
I/O  
Signal  
I/ O  
Data  
2
3
4
5
N/ A  
N/ A  
N/ A  
I/ O  
Reserved  
Ground  
+5 V dc  
Keyboard clock  
Reserved  
6
N/ A  
96 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port  
The I/ O board has one auxiliary-device port that supports a mouse or other pointing  
device.  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the auxiliary-device  
connector on the rear of the server.  
6
4
5
3
1
2
Table 13. Auxiliary-device connector pin-number assignments .  
Pin Signal  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data  
Not connected  
Ground  
+5 V dc  
Clock  
Not connected  
Ultra2 (LVD) SCSI ports  
The server supports an optional IBM ServeRAID controller. This controller provides  
three independent SCSI channels. A 16-bit (wide) LVD SCSI cable connects the hard  
disk drive backplane to one channel of the RAID controller. Two 68-pin SCSI  
connectors for two additional channels are on the rear of the server. Refer to “Using  
The server has a dual-channel Ultra-2 small computer system interface (SCSI)  
controller. This controller supports two independent SCSI channels: one external and  
one internal. Each of these channels supports up to 15 SCSI devices. You can use the  
external LVD SCSI channel connector, on the rear of the server, to connect different  
types of SCSI devices, such as drives or printers.  
SCSI cabling requirements  
If you plan to attach external SCSI devices, you must order additional SCSI cables. To  
select and order the correct cables for use with external devices, contact your IBM  
reseller or IBM marketing representative.  
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable between the terminated  
ends of the cable, refer to the ANSI SCSI standards. Adhering to these standards will  
help ensure that the server operates properly.  
Setting SCSI IDs  
Each SCSI device connected to a SCSI controller must have a unique SCSI ID. This ID  
enables the SCSI controller to identify the device and ensure that different devices on  
the same SCSI channel do not attempt to transfer data simultaneously. SCSI devices  
that are connected to different SCSI channels can have duplicate SCSI IDs. SCSI IDs 6  
and 7 are reserved for the SCSI controller on either SCSI channel A or B. The following  
table lists the SCSI IDs for devices that are connected to one channel. In Table 14 on  
page 98, the hot-swap hard disk drive bays are in the standard (vertical)  
configuration.  
Installing options 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Standard (SCSI channel A)  
Drive bay 1: SCSI ID 0  
Optional (SCSI channel B)  
Drive bay 1: SCSI ID 11  
Drive bay 2: SCSI ID 1  
Drive bay 3: SCSI ID 2  
Drive bay 4: SCSI ID 3  
Drive bay 5: SCSI ID 4  
Backplane: SCSI ID 8  
Drive bay 2: SCSI ID 12  
Drive bay 3: SCSI ID 13  
Drive bay 4: SCSI ID 14  
Drive bay 5: SCSI ID 15  
Backplane: SCSI ID 9  
Table 14. SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives and  
backplanes (standard configuration).  
The hot-swap-drive backplane controls the SCSI IDs for the internal hot-swap drive  
bays. However, when you attach SCSI devices to the external SCSI connector, you  
must set a unique ID for the device. Refer to the information that is provided with the  
device for instructions to set its SCSI ID.  
SCSI connector pin-number assignments  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI  
connectors.  
1
34  
35  
68  
Table 15. 68-pin SCSI connector pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal  
Pin  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
Signal  
+Data 12  
+Data 13  
+Data 14  
+Data 15  
+Data P1  
+Data 0  
+Data1  
+Data 2  
+Data 3  
+Data 4  
+Data 5  
+Data 6  
+Data 7  
+Data P  
Ground  
DIFFSENS  
Term power  
Term power  
Reserved  
Ground  
+Attention  
Ground  
+Busy  
-Data 12  
-Data 13  
-Data 14  
-Data 15  
-Data P1  
-Data 0  
-Data 1  
-Data 2  
-Data 3  
-Data 4  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
-Data 5  
-Data 6  
-Data 7  
-Data P  
Ground  
Ground  
Term power  
Term power  
Reserved  
Ground  
-Attention  
Ground  
-Busy  
-Acknowledge  
-Reset  
-Message  
-Select  
+Acknowledge  
+Reset  
+Message  
+Select  
98 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 15. 68-pin SCSI connector pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Signal  
+Control/ Data  
+Request  
+Input/ Output  
+Data 8  
+Data 9  
+Data 10  
+Data 11  
Pin  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
Signal  
-Control/ Data  
-Request  
-Input/ Output  
-Data 8  
-Data9  
-Data 10  
-Data 11  
Serial ports  
The server has two standard serial ports: Serial port A and Serial port B. The  
operating system can use and share both serial ports; however, the integrated  
Advanced System Management Processor can use and share only Serial port A.  
Some application programs require specific ports, and some modems function  
properly only at certain communication port addresses. You might need to use the  
Configuration/ Setup Utility program to change communication port address  
assignments to prevent or resolve address conflicts.  
Viewing or changing the serial-port assignments  
To view or change the serial-port assignments:  
1. Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.  
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setupappears, press F1.  
3. From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.  
Note: The Devices and I/ O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration  
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must enter the  
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.  
4. Select the serial port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the settings  
available.  
5. Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the Configuration/ Setup  
Utility main menu.  
Serial-port connectors  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 9-pin, male D-shell  
serial-port connectors on the rear of the server. These pin-number assignments  
conform to the industry standard.  
5
1
6
9
Table 16. Serial-port connectors pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Data carrier detect  
Pin  
6
Signal  
Data set ready  
2
3
4
Receive data  
Transmit data  
Data terminal ready  
7
8
9
Request to send  
Clear to send  
Ring indicator  
Installing options 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Table 16. Serial-port connectors pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
5
Signal ground  
Universal Serial Bus ports  
The server has two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports that configure automatically.  
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia devices. It  
uses Plug and Play technology to determine the type of device attached to the  
connector.  
Notes:  
1. If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the USB  
ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test (POST).  
2. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse port, the USB keyboard emulates a  
mouse and you will not be able to disable the mouse settings in the  
Configuration/ Setup Utility program.  
3. Check to make sure your NOS supports USB devices.  
USB cables and hubs  
You need a 4-pin cable to connect devices to USB 1 or USB 2. If you plan to attach  
more than two USB devices to the machine, you must use a hub to connect the  
devices. The hub provides multiple connectors for attaching additional external USB  
devices with a maximum of 127 external devices.  
USB technology provides up to 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) speed with a  
maximum of 127 external devices and a maximum signal distance of five meters (16  
ft.) per segment.  
USB-port connectors  
Each USB port has an external connector on the rear of the server for attaching USB  
compatible devices.  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the USB-port connectors  
on the rear of the server.  
Table 17. USB-port connector pin-number assignments.  
Pin  
1
Signal  
VCC  
2
-Data  
3
4
+Data  
Ground  
Ethernet port  
Your server comes with an integrated Ethernet controller. This controller provides an  
interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps networks and provides full-duplex  
(FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception of data on  
the Ethernet local area network (LAN).  
To access the Ethernet port, connect a Category 3, 4 or 5 unshielded twisted-pair  
(UTP) cable to the RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server.  
100 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the  
network be Category 5 or higher.  
Configuring the Ethernet controller  
When you connect the server to the network, the Ethernet controller automatically  
detects the data-transfer rate (10Mbps or 100Mbps) on the network and then sets the  
controller to operate at the appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet controller will  
adjust to the network data rate, whether the data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASE-  
T), Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX). The  
controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.  
The Ethernet controller is a PCI Plug and Play device. You do not need to set any  
jumpers or configure the controller for the operating system before you use the  
Ethernet controller. However, you must install a device driver to enable the operating  
system to address the Ethernet controller. The device drivers are provided on the  
ServerGuide CDs.  
Failover for redundant Ethernet  
The IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapter is an optional redundant network interface  
card (NIC adapter) that you can install in the server. If you install this NIC adapter  
and connect it to the same logical LAN segment as the primary Ethernet controller,  
you can configure the server to support a failover function. You can configure either  
the integrated Ethernet controller or the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet  
controller. In failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a link failure,  
all Ethernet traffic associated with it is switched to the redundant (secondary)  
controller. This switching occurs without any user intervention. When the primary  
link is restored to an operational state, the Ethernet traffic switches back to the  
primary Ethernet controller. The switch back to the primary Ethernet controller can be  
automatic or manually controlled, depending on the setup and operating system.  
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active at any given time. For  
example, if the primary Ethernet controller is active, then the secondary Ethernet  
controller cannot be used for any other network operation.  
Note: The operating system determines the maximum number of IBM 10/ 100 Fault  
Tolerant Adapters that you can install in the server. See the documentation  
that comes with the adapter for more information.  
Considerations when combining failover and hot-plug  
functions: If the operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and the optional  
redundant NIC adapter is installed in a hot-plug PCI slot, you can replace the NIC  
adapter without powering off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet  
controller. Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the primary Ethernet controller will  
cause the Ethernet traffic to switch automatically to the secondary Ethernet controller.  
This can be very useful if a faulty adapter causes a network problem, or if you want to  
upgrade the primary adapter hardware.  
Note: If you hot replace the primary adapter while the Ethernet traffic is being  
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not  
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter  
comes back online. See “Configuring for failover”.  
Configuring for failover: The failover feature currently is supported by OS/ 2™,  
Windows NT Server, and IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating  
system follows.  
Windows NT Server: IBM offers hot-plug support for Windows NT Server Version 4.0.  
Failover can work in conjunction with hot-plug support or independently. If you are  
not using hot-plug support, go to “Windows NT Server failover setup” on page 102.  
Installing options 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Windows NT Server hot-plug setup: IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0  
package is available for download from the IBM Web site at:  
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support  
Enter the brand type of Server, click on Downloadable files and look for Hot Plug.  
The IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package uses the Intel Desktop  
Management Interface (DMI) to control hot-plug support for the Ethernet controllers.  
The Ethernet controller in the computer is DMI compliant. Download and install the  
following software in the order listed:  
1. IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent  
2. IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution  
3. IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapter device drivers  
Note: The order of installation is important. You must install the IBM Hot Plug for  
Windows NT Server 4.0 package before you install the IBM 10/ 100 Fault  
Tolerant Adapter driver. If you install the adapter device driver before the PCI  
Hot Plug Solution package, the adapter device driver will not recognize the  
hot-plug code. This happens because the adapter device driver only checks  
the NT registry for the Hot Plug package during installation. If the PCI Hot  
Plug Solution package is added after the adapter device driver is installed, the  
adapter must be removed and added again in order for it to detect the PCI  
Hot-Plug Solution code.  
To install the IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent:  
1. Download the IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent DMI  
Agent file from the Support web page and extract the files onto a diskette.  
2. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.  
3. From the Start menu, select the Run option.  
4. Type A:\ SETUP.EXE in the Open box.  
5. Click Ok. The setup wizard opens.  
6. Follow the instructions that are given by the setup wizard until the program is  
installed.  
7. Restart the server.  
To install the IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution package:  
1. Download the IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution file from the  
support web page and extract the files onto a diskette.  
2. Log on to Windows NT Server as a user in the Administrator group.  
3. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.  
4. From the Start menu, select the Run option.  
5. Type A:\ SETUP.EXE in the Open box.  
6. Click OK. The Setup wizard opens.  
7. Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.  
Windows NT Server failover setup: To install the IBM 10/ 100 Fault Tolerant Adapter  
device drivers:  
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions that are provided  
with the adapter.  
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter  
device driver.  
3. Do not select the Grouping box at this point; you must first restart the machine.  
102 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. From the Windows NT Server desktop, select Control Panel, then select the  
Network icon, then select the Adapters tab.  
5. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the redundant pair and then click the  
Properties... button.  
6. Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible combinations for redundant  
pairs.  
7. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK. Note that the integrated  
Ethernet controller is located at PCI C.  
Two options are available for recovering from a failover condition. The options  
are determined by the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox. If the IBM  
Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package is installed, this checkbox will  
appear at the bottom of the Adapter Properties panel. If you do not have the IBM  
Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package installed on the server, you will  
not see the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox.  
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is not checked or is not  
present, traffic will automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the  
primary link status is restored. In this mode, the adapter cannot be hot-swapped.  
Users with the IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package installed  
should check the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox.  
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, traffic will  
remain on the secondary adapter until the user directs it to return to the primary  
adapter. This can be done after the hot-swap replacement of the primary adapter  
or by using the DMI interface.  
8. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.  
When you restart the server, the failover function will be in effect.  
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event Viewer log. In addition, if  
the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, a DMI alert will also be  
generated.  
IntraNetWare: The IBM PCI Hot Plug System Bus Driver Diskette for Novell Netware  
V4.41, V4.42, and V5.0 is available for download from the IBM Web site at:  
http:/ / www.pc.ibm.com/ support  
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:  
The operating system console generates a message.  
The custom counters for the device driver contain variables that define the state of  
the failover function and the location of the redundant pair. You can use the  
NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.  
Note: If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic was being  
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not  
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter  
comes back online. In this case, issue the command:  
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW SCAN  
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located. This  
command causes the device driver to locate the primary adapter and switch  
the Ethernet traffic to it.  
Ethernet port connector  
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector.  
These assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices.  
Installing options 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 18. Ethernet RJ-45 connector pin-number assignments..  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
Signal  
Transmit data+  
Transmit data-  
Receive data+  
Not connected  
Pin  
5
6
7
8
Signal  
Not connected  
Receive data -  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Advanced System Management ports  
Your server has three communication ports dedicated to the Advanced System  
Management Processor. One port uses a standard D-shell serial-port connector,  
connector C. The other two ports, which are used for the ASM Interconnect function,  
use a dual RJ-45 connector.  
You can attach a dedicated modem to the D-shell system-management connector on  
the rear of the server to communicate with the integrated Advanced System  
Management Processor.  
The ASM Interconnect function uses the RJ-45 system-management connectors. This  
function enables you to connect the Advanced System Management Processors of  
several rack-mounted servers so that they can communicate with each other in half-  
duplex mode.  
Cabling the server  
Refer to the following illustration for the location of input and output connectors.  
104 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Systems  
Management Interconnect knockout  
Parallel  
Serial A  
System management  
Ethernet  
Serial B  
ASM Interconnect  
port A  
USB1  
USB2  
ASM Interconnect  
port B  
Video  
Keyboard  
Ultra2 SCSI  
Mouse  
Refer to the following illustration for an example of proper cable routing.  
Installing the server in a rack  
Refer to the Rack Installation Instructions for rack installation and removal instructions.  
Installing options 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRU information (service only)  
Field Replacement Units (FRUs) should be replaced by qualified service personnel  
only.  
Diagnostic switch card  
Use the following illustration when replacing the diagnostic switch card.  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
4
S
P
3
S
P
P
S 2  
P
M
E
T
1
N
S P  
F A  
E C  
S P  
E R  
O
C
M
R
V
C I  
P
V
D
N O  
E
R
N
I B  
P U  
C
P C  
I A  
M
E
C
M
P
1
D
S
P
S
D A  
I
M
N
I
M
S
1∼  
2∼  
Holding screw  
Diagnostic switch card  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. DIsconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108) and move it  
back slightly.  
5. Disconnect the front LED card assembly cable from the diagnostic switch card.  
6. Disconnect the diagnostic switch card cable.  
7. Remove the screw from the diagnostic switch card.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Replace the card and reattach the front LED card cable and the diagnostic switch  
card cable.  
Disconnecting the shuttle  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Flip the top end of each diagonal side latch inward.  
5. Move each latch toward the rear of the shuttle until the latch is vertical.  
6. Fold the hinged top end of each latch outwards at the notch of the chassis.  
7. Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server.  
8. To remove the shuttle, see “Removing the shuttle” on page 115.  
Front LED card assembly  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
108 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
P S  
S 3  
P
P
S 2  
M
P
E
T
1
N
P S  
F
A
P E C  
R
E
S
I C  
M
O
V
C
V R  
D
N O  
P
E
R
N
I B  
U
C
C P  
P
I A  
M
E
C
M
P
1
D
S
P
S
D A  
I
N M  
I
M
S
1∼  
2∼  
Retaining screws  
Front LED card assembly  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Disconnect the cable to the diagnostic switch card.  
5. Remove the two retaining screws that secure the board in place.  
6. Remove and replace the board.  
I/O Legacy board  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Attention:  
Existing system configuration will be lost. If possible, save the existing system  
configuration or obtain a previously saved copy.  
After replacing the I/ O Legacy board, flash the system with the latest level BIOS.  
Match the BIOS level currently installed on the system.  
Use the following illustration as a guide to removing the I/ O Legacy board.  
FRU information (service only) 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Power-off the server off, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)  
6. Remove the four shuttle screws (two on each side).  
7. Push in on the shuttle touchpoints.  
8. Separate the shuttle from the I/ O Legacy board.  
9. To replace the I/ O Legacy board, reverse this procedure.  
Memory card removal  
Before you begin:  
110 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace the memory card assembly:  
1. Power-off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect external cables and  
power cords and remove the top cover.  
2. Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover  
from the processor housing.  
3. Lift up on the memory card assembly and remove it from the server.  
Note: When setting down the memory card assembly, be sure to place the  
assembly only on a static-protective surface, such as a static-protective  
package.  
4. Remove the memory modules (DIMMs) from the memory card assembly and seat  
them in the new memory card assembly. See “Installing memory-module kits” on  
Note: Be sure to put the memory modules in the same positions on the  
replacement assembly as they occupied on the assembly that has been  
removed from the server.  
5. Install the memory card assembly:  
a. Hold the memory card assembly and align it over the memory card  
connector.  
b. Insert the memory card assembly into the connector.  
6. Install the processor housing cover and push the two pop rivets down to secure  
the cover.  
FRU information (service only) 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PCI switch card  
Before you begin:  
1∼  
2∼  
Switch card latches  
Switch card assembly  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Disconnect the switch card cable from the Processor/ PCI board.  
5. Disengage the switch card:  
a. Press the switch card latches toward the front and sides of the server.  
b. Push the latches through the notches.  
6. When the switch card latches have been disengaged from the notches, gently pull  
the switch card free and lift it up and out of the server.  
Note: You may have to tilt the top of the switch card toward the front of the  
server when removing it.  
7. To replace the switch card, reverse the steps above.  
Power backplane assembly  
Before you begin:  
112 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1∼  
2∼  
Retaining screws  
Power backplane assembly  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
5. Remove the hot-swap power supplies (reverse the steps in “Installing a hot-swap  
6. Turn the two retaining screws one-quarter turn.  
7. Lift the power backplane assembly.  
8. To replace the power backplane assembly, reverse this procedure.  
Note: When replacing the power backplane assembly, you must align the bottom  
of the assembly with the notches on the floor of the server.  
Processor/PCI backplane  
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.  
Note: Existing system configuration will be lost. If possible, save the existing system  
configuration or obtain a previously saved copy.  
FRU information (service only) 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1∼  
2∼  
3∼  
Cutouts  
Processor/ PCI Backplane assembly  
Microprocessors  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)  
6. Disconnect the power cable.  
7. Disconnect the front fan cable.  
8. Disconnect the rear fan cable.  
9. Remove any hot-plug adapters (reverse the steps in “Installing a hot-plug adapter  
10. Remove microprocessors, voltage regulator modules and terminator cards  
11. Remove memory card.  
12. Press the assembly inward at the cutouts to release the notches.  
13. Lift the assembly out of the shuttle.  
Note: Lift the assembly at an angle for easier removal.  
14. To install the new Processor/ PCI board, reverse the above procedure.  
114 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the shuttle  
1. Power-off the server, if it is on.  
2. Disconnect the power cord for each power supply from the electrical outlet.  
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the  
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power supply from the  
electrical outlet.  
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).  
4. Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)  
5. Place one hand on the handle at the front portion of the shuttle, and place the  
other hand on the ledge at the rear of the shuttle.  
6. Lift the shuttle at an angle with the rear of the shuttle being removed first and  
remove the shuttle from the server.  
FRU information (service only) 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
116 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using IBM ServeRAID  
Note: For a list of ServeRAID error codes, see “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes”  
The following information is for configuring an IBM ServeRAID-3H, ServeRAID-  
3HB, or ServeRAID-3L. These high-performance, redundant array of independent  
disk (RAID) controllers are ideally suited for data-storage environments that require  
superior performance, flexibility, and reliable data storage.  
You also can use the configuration and reference information in this chapter to  
configure the IBM ServeRAID controllers provided on some IBM server system  
boards.  
Understanding RAID technology  
RAID is the technology of grouping several physical drives in a computer into an  
array that you can define as one or more logical drives. Each logical drive appears to  
the operating system as a single drive. This grouping technique greatly enhances  
logical-drive capacity and performance beyond the physical limitations of a single  
physical drive.  
When you group multiple physical drives into a logical drive, the ServeRAID  
controller can transfer data in parallel from the multiple drives in the array. This  
parallel transfer yields data-transfer rates that are many times higher than with  
nonarrayed drives. This increased speed makes the system better able to meet the  
throughput (the amount of work in a given amount of time) or productivity needs of  
the multiple-user network environment.  
The ability to respond to multiple data requests provides not only an impressive  
increase in throughput, but also a decrease in response time. The combination of  
parallel transfers and simultaneous responses to multiple requests allows disk arrays  
to provide a high level of performance in network environments.  
Stripe-unit size  
With RAID technology, data is striped across an array of physical drives. This data-  
distribution scheme complements the way the operating system requests data.  
The granularity at which data is stored on one drive of the array before subsequent  
data is stored on the next drive of the array is called the stripe-unit size.  
You can control the stripe-unit size and maximize the performance of the ServeRAID  
controller by setting a stripe-unit size to a value that is close to the size of the system  
I/ O requests. You can set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB. For  
example, performance in transaction-based environments, which typically involve  
large blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64  
KB; however, performance in file and print environments, which typically involve  
multiple small blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit size is set to 8 KB  
or 16 KB.  
The collection, in logical order of these stripe units, from the first drive of the array to  
the last drive of the array, is called a stripe.  
Note: If you are using the ServeRAID-3L:  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Eight physical drives are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is set  
to 32 KB or 64 KB.  
Sixteen physical drives are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is  
set to 8 KB or 16 KB.  
If you are using the ServeRAID-3H or ServeRAID-3HB, sixteen physical drives  
are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB.  
Supported RAID levels  
Disk arrays are used to improve performance and reliability. The amount of  
improvement depends on the application programs that you run on the server, the  
RAID levels that you assign to the logical drives, and the stripe-unit size.  
The ServeRAID controllers support RAID level-0, RAID level-1, RAID level-1  
Enhanced (1E), RAID level-5 and RAID level-5 Enhanced (5E).  
Understanding RAID level-0  
RAID level-0 stripes the data across all the drives in the array. This offers substantial  
speed enhancement, but provides for no data redundancy. RAID level-0 provides the  
largest capacity of the RAID levels offered, because no room is taken up for redundant  
data or data-parity storage.  
RAID level-0 requires a minimum of one drive and, depending upon the level of  
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.  
The following illustration shows an example of a RAID level-0 logical drive.  
You start with two physical drives.  
Create an array using the two physical drives.  
Then, create a logical drive within that array.  
118 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the data is striped  
across all the drives in the array, but no redundant data is stored.  
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
A physical drive failure within the array results in loss of data in the logical drive  
assigned RAID level-0, but only in that logical drive. If you have logical drives  
assigned RAID level-1, 1E, 5, or 5E in the same array, they will not lose data.  
Note: You can assign RAID level-0 only to logical drives in an array that contains  
only one physical drive.  
When you replace a failed drive, the ServeRAID controller can rebuild all the RAID  
level-1E and RAID level-5E logical drives automatically onto the replacement  
physical drive. However, any data stored in a failed RAID level-0 logical drive is lost.  
Though the risk of data loss is present, you might want to assign RAID level-0 to one  
of the logical drives to take advantage of the speed offered with this RAID level. You  
could use this logical drive to enter data that you back up each day and for which  
safety is not of primary importance, that is, data that you can re-create easily. You also  
might want to use a RAID level-0 logical drive when the work you are doing requires  
maximum drive capacity.  
Understanding RAID Level-1  
RAID level-1 provides 100% data redundancy and requires only two physical drives.  
With RAID level-1, the first half of a stripe is the original data; the second half of a  
stripe is a mirror (that is, a copy) of the data, but written to the other drive in the RAID  
level-1 array.  
Because the data is mirrored, the capacity of the logical drive when assigned RAID  
level-1 is 50% of the array capacity.  
The following illustration shows an example of a RAID level-1 logical drive.  
You start with two physical drives.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Create an array using the two physical drives.  
Then, create a logical drive within that array.  
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the data on the drive  
on the right is a mirror copy of the drive on the left.  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
With RAID level-1, if one of the physical drives fails, the ServeRAID controller  
switches read and write requests to the remaining functional drive in the RAID level-  
1 array.  
Understanding RAID Level-1 Enhanced  
If you have three or more physical drives in the array, you can no longer select RAID  
level-1, but you can select RAID level-1 Enhanced (also called RAID level-1E).  
RAID level-1E combines mirroring with data striping. This RAID level stripes data  
and copies of the data across all of the drives in the array. As with the standard RAID  
120 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
level-1, the data is mirrored, and the capacity of the logical drive is 50% of the array  
capacity of the grouping of physical drives in the array.  
RAID level-1E requires a minimum of three drives and, depending upon the level of  
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.  
The following illustration is an example of an Enhanced RAID level-1 logical drive.  
You start with three physical drives.  
Create an array using the physical drives.  
Then, create a logical drive within that array.  
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the stripe labeled ꢀ  
is the data stripe and the stripe labeled ꢀ ꢀ is the mirror (that is, the copy) of the  
preceding data stripe. Also notice that each block on the mirror stripe is shifted one  
drive.  
1
3
4
2
1
5
3
2
6
*
**  
x
*
6
4
5
**  
Using IBM ServeRAID 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
With RAID level-1E, if one of the physical drives fails, the ServeRAID controller  
switches read and write requests to the remaining functional drives in the RAID level-  
1E array.  
Understanding RAID Level-5  
RAID level-5 requires a minimum of three physical drives. This RAID level stripes  
data and parity across all drives in the array. When an array is assigned RAID level-5,  
the capacity of the array is reduced by one drive (for data-parity storage).  
RAID level-5 is generally the most desirable choice, because it offers both data  
protection and increased throughput. RAID level-5 gives you higher capacity than  
RAID level-1, but RAID level-1 offers better performance.  
The RAID level-5 requires a minimum of three drives and, depending upon the level  
of firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.  
The following illustration is an example of a RAID level-5 logical drive.  
You start with four physical drives.  
x
Create an array using three of the physical drives, leaving the fourth as a hot-spare  
drive.  
x
Then, create a logical drive within that array.  
x
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the storage of the  
data parity (denoted by ) also is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive.  
122 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
4
*
3
*
x
5
6
*
7
8
*
A parity block ( ) contains a representation of the data from the other blocks in the  
same stripe.  
If a physical drive fails in the array, the ServeRAID controller switches read and write  
requests to the remaining functional drive in the RAID level-5 array, which is a hot-  
spare drive.  
2
4
1
*
3
*
x
5
6
*
8
7
*
Understanding RAID Level-5 Enhanced  
RAID level-5 Enhanced (also called RAID level-5E) requires a minimum of four  
physical drives. RAID level-5E is also firmware-specific. You can think of RAID level-  
5E as "RAID level-5 with a built-in spare drive."  
Reading from and writing to four disk drives is more efficient than three disk drives  
and an idle hot spare and therefore improves performance. Additionally, the spare  
drive is actually part of the RAID level-5E array, as shown in the following example.  
With such a configuration, you cannot share the spare drive with other arrays. If you  
want a spare drive for any other array, you must have another spare drive for those  
arrays.  
Like RAID level-5, this RAID level stripes data and parity across all of the drives in  
the array. When an array is assigned RAID level-5E, the capacity of the logical drive is  
reduced by the capacity of two physical drives in the array (that is, one for parity and  
one for the spare).  
RAID level-5E is a very desirable choice, because it offers both data protection and  
increased throughput, in addition to the built-in spare drive.  
Note: For RAID level-5E, you can have only one logical drive in an array. When  
using RAID level-5E, you can have a maximum of seven logical drives on the  
controller.  
RAID level-5E requires a minimum of four drives and, depending upon the level of  
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.  
The following illustration is an example of a RAID level-5E logical drive.  
You start with four physical drives.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
x
Create an array using all four physical drives.  
Then, create a logical drive (labeled as 1) within the array. Notice that the distributed  
spare drive is the free space (labeled as 2) below the logical drive.  
1
x
2
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks in the logical drive. The storage  
of the data parity (denoted by ) is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive as it does  
in RAID level-5. Notice that the spare drive is not striped.  
1
2
5
3
6
9
*
4
*
x
7
8
*
If a physical drive fails in the array, the data from the failed drive is compressed into  
the distributed spare drive. The logical drive remains RAID level-5E. When you  
replace the failed drive, the data for the logical drive decompresses and returns to the  
original striping scheme.  
124 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
4
*
3
*
x
5
6
*
7
8
*
9
*
Note: The ServeRAID Manager program Express configuration does not default to  
RAID level-5E. If you have four physical drives, Express configuration  
defaults to RAID level-5 with a hot-spare drive.  
Selecting a RAID level and performance tuning  
1 2  
When selecting a RAID level for the system, consider the following:  
RAID level  
Description  
RAID level-0 Data redundancy: No  
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 100%  
Read performance: Excellent  
Write performance: Excellent  
Built-in spare drive: No  
RAID level-1 Data redundancy: Yes  
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50%  
Read performance: Very good  
Write performance: Very good  
Built-in spare drive: No  
RAID level-  
1E  
Data redundancy: Yes  
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50%  
Read performance: Very good  
Write performance: Very good  
Built-in spare drive: No  
RAID level-5 Data redundancy: Yes  
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 67% to 94%  
Read performance: Excellent  
Write performance: Good  
Built-in spare drive: No  
RAID level-  
5E  
Data redundancy: Yes  
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50% to 88%  
Read performance: Excellent  
Write performance: Good  
Built-in spare drive: Yes  
Drive state descriptions  
This section provides descriptions of the physical and logical drive states.  
1.Depending on the number of physical drives in the array.  
2.Performance depends on the number of drives in the array. Generally, the more drives in the array, the better the performance.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Physical drive state descriptions  
The following table provides descriptions of the valid physical drive states.  
Drive State  
Defunct  
Meaning  
A physical drive in the Online, Hot-Spare, or Rebuild state has become defunct. It does not  
respond to commands, which means that the ServeRAID controller cannot communicate  
properly with the drive.  
If a physical drive has become defunct, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.  
Hot Spare  
A Hot-Spare drive is a physical drive that is defined for automatic use when a similar drive  
fails.  
Online  
The drive is Online. It is functioning properly and is part of an array.  
The drive is being rebuilt.  
Rebuilding  
For more information on rebuilding a drive, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page  
Ready  
The ServeRAID controller recognizes a Ready drive as being available for definition.  
Standby Hot Spare  
A Standby Hot Spare is a Hot-Spare drive that the ServeRAID controller has spun down. If  
an Online drive becomes Defunct and no suitable Hot-Spare drive is available, a Standby  
Hot-Spare drive of the appropriate size automatically spins up, and enters the Rebuild state.  
Logical drive state descriptions  
The following table provides descriptions of the valid logical drive states.  
Drive State  
Meaning  
Blocked  
During a rebuild operation, the ServeRAID controller sets the state of any RAID level-0 logical  
drives associated with a failed array to the Blocked state; then, it reconstructs the data that was  
stored in RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, Raid level-5 and RAID level-5E logical drives.  
After the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives, and  
access them once again. However, the logical drive might contain damaged data. You must  
either re-create, reinstall, or restore the data from the most recent backup disk or tape to the  
RAID level-0 logical drive.  
Critical Migrating  
Critical System  
A logical drive in the critical state that is undergoing a logical drive migration (LDM).  
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved state during a logical drive migration (LDM)  
when the logical drive is in the critical state.  
Critical  
A RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, RAID level-5, or RAID level-5E logical drive that contains a  
defunct physical drive is in the critical state. A critical logical drive is accessible, despite a  
physical drive failure.  
Attention:  
If the state of the logical drive is critical, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.  
Migrating  
The logical drive is undergoing a logical drive migration; that is, a change in RAID levels, a  
change in logical drive size, an increase in free space, or a RAID level-5E compression or  
decompression.  
126 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drive State  
Offline  
Meaning  
The logical drive is offline and not accessible. This state occurs when one of the following is  
true.  
One or more physical drives in a RAID level-0 logical drive is defunct.  
Two or more physical drives in a RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, or level-5 logical drive are  
defunct.  
Three or more drives in a RAID level-5E logical drive are defunct.  
If any of these are true, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.  
The logical drive is okay. It is in a good, functional state.  
Okay  
System  
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved state during logical drive migration (LDM).  
Configuring controllers using the ServeRAID Manager program  
This chapter provides the information needed to start and use the ServeRAID  
Manager program. You can use the ServeRAID Manager program to easily configure  
and monitor the ServeRAID controllers. You can also use the ServeRAID Manager  
program to configure two ServeRAID controllers in a failover environment.  
The information in this chapter is a high level explanation of the ServeRAID Manager  
program and its capabilities. For instructions on specific processes using the  
ServeRAID Manager program, refer to the ServeRAID Manager online help.  
Note: The ServeRAID Manager program works with systems using Microsoft  
Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Novell NetWare, IBM OS/ 2, and  
SCO UnixWare.  
Using the ServeRAID Manager program interface  
The graphical interface in the ServeRAID Manager program makes it easy for you to  
create, delete, change, view and monitor the ServeRAID configuration.  
Before you begin, review the following illustration to become familiar with the layout  
of the ServeRAID Manager program screens.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 1. ServeRAID Manager program screen layout  
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:  
1. Menu bar  
Provides File, View, Remote, Actions, and Help pull-down menus.  
2. Tool bar  
Provides quick-path icons for common tasks. The icons from left to right are  
Add remote system, Create arrays, Configure for clustering, Scan for new  
or removed ready drives, Silence repeating alarm, and Help.  
3. Main Tree  
Provides an expandable tree view of the ServeRAID subsystem. You will  
perform most of the ServeRAID configuration and maintenance tasks by first  
128 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
selecting the ServeRAID controller, array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or  
physical drive objects from this Main Tree.  
4. Main Panel  
Provides specific device information or configuration instructions. When the  
ServeRAID Manager program is in the Information mode and you select an  
object from the Main Tree, detailed information about the object appears in  
this panel. When the ServeRAID Manager program is in the Configuration  
mode, the instructions needed to configure the ServeRAID subsystem appear  
in this panel.  
5. Event viewer  
Provides advisory and progressive-status information and messages during  
the ServeRAID configuration process and while monitoring systems with  
ServeRAID controllers. Each message appears with a host name from where  
the event originated, a time stamp, a date stamp, and an icon that classifies  
the severity of the event. The event icons are:  
Information: An "i" inside a blue circle  
Warning: A "!" inside a yellow triangle  
Fatal: An "x" inside a red circle  
Warning messages identify potential data-loss situations, and Fatal messages  
inform you when a failure has occurred. All Fatal messages will launch an  
audible alarm.  
6. Status bar  
Provides three types of information in a resizable panel. The panels contain  
the following information:  
The left panel displays the managed system status, which is either No  
problems detected on any system or Problems detected on one or more  
systems.  
The center panel displays the current tree path.  
The right panel displays a progress meter with the label of the currently  
selected system and the process that is taking place at the current time.  
Using utility programs  
This section provides the information needed to start and use the FlashMan program,  
the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON  
command-line programs.  
Using FlashMan, the IBM ServeRAID ROM Update  
program  
FlashMan is an easy to use program that simplifies the updating of BIOS and  
firmware on ServeRAID controllers. FlashMan reports the current BIOS version,  
firmware version, and update status for each controller found. FlashMan also reports  
if a controller needs updating. You decide whether or not to update the controllers,  
but you must update all the controllers or none (that is, you cannot selectively  
update).  
FlashMan is provided on the IBM ServeRAID Support CD packaged with the  
ServeRAID controller, and it also is provided on the configuration CD packaged with  
some IBM server models.  
To access FlashMan:  
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Support CD into the system CD-ROM drive.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Turn on the system.  
3. The FlashMan splash screen appears. FlashMan automatically scans and  
identifies each ServeRAID controller in the system. After scanning completes and  
if an update is required, a report screen appears with the following information:  
Controller types found  
Controller slot number, if known  
Firmware version  
BIOS version  
Update status. If a controller has down-level BIOS or firmware, the controller  
is marked as a candidate for update.  
4. If any of the ServeRAID controller require updating, click Update to update all  
marked ServeRAID controllers. The controller BIOS or firmware is updated from  
the IBM ServeRAID Support CD or IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.  
FlashMan displays a progress indicator as it updates the controllers. If FlashMan  
detects an error, it displays the error message and saves the error message to a file  
on the disk.  
If you do not want to update the ServeRAID controllers, click Cancel.  
5. When all updates are complete, scroll through the New Feature window. This  
window reports the changes that FlashMan applied to the ServeRAID controllers.  
Note: When the splash screen appears, you can use Ctrl+L to copy all updated files  
to the RAMDISK. Use this keystroke only when instructed by IBM Support.  
Using the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program  
The ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program is a quick way to display the current  
settings for the ServeRAID controller. You also can use this program to perform a  
limited set of the configuration functions without using the IBM ServeRAID Support  
CD.  
To access the Mini-Configuration program:  
1. Turn on the server. If the server already is turned on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del.  
2. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt appears, press Ctrl+I.  
3. If the system contains more than one ServeRAID controller, a selection screen will  
appear. To continue:  
a. Use the Up Arrow (Ν) or Down Arrow () key to select a controller.  
b. Press Enter.  
If the system contains only one ServeRAID controller, or after you select a  
ServeRAID controller, the Main Menu appears.  
Descriptions of the choices available from the Main Menu of the Mini-  
Configuration program are as follows:  
View Controller Status shows the current status of the ServeRAID controller.  
View Configuration shows the current configuration information for the  
ServeRAID controller. (See “Viewing the configuration” on page 131 for more  
information.)  
Advanced Functions is used to initialize the configuration, import  
configuration from drives, configure BIOS settings, and view the controller  
page 132 for more information.)  
4. Use the Up Arrow (Ν) or Down Arrow () key to highlight your choice; then, press  
Enter.  
130 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.  
6. Click Exit; then, press Enter.  
Viewing the controller status  
When you select View Controller Status from the Main Menu, the following  
information appears on the screen:  
All physical drives and their states  
Unattended shows the current state of the Unattended mode.  
— When this option is set to Off, you can choose the recovery method when a  
ServeRAID controller startup error occurs.  
— When this option is set to On, the ServeRAID controller chooses the recovery  
method when a startup error occurs.  
Read Ahead shows the current state of the read-ahead cache mode.  
BootCD shows the current state of the Bootable CD-ROM function. (Refer to  
Setting the Bootable CD-ROM feature” on page 132.)  
CompMode shows the current BIOS compatibility mode. On indicates 8 gigabyte  
(GB) Extended; Off indicated 2 gigabyte (GB) Limited.  
Clustered shows the current state for clustering.  
BBWC shows the cache size of the battery-backup write cache, if it is installed (8 =  
8 MB or 32 = 32 MB) or No if there is a no battery-backup write cache installed.  
Boot Blk shows the version number of the startable microcode (or firmware)  
loaded for the ServeRAID controller.  
Code Blk shows the current version number of the microcode (or firmware)  
loaded for the ServeRAID controller.  
Rebuild Rate shows the current speed setting for rebuilds: High, Medium, or  
Low.  
Number of Defunct drives shows the current number of Defunct physical drives.  
Number of Offline drives shows the current number of Offline logical drives.  
Number of Critical drives shows the current number of Critical logical drives.  
Config. Updates shows the number of times that the configuration has been  
changed since it has been initialized. When you initialize the configuration, the  
Config. Update resets to zero.  
Bad Stripe, Locked Stripe, or Blocked Drive identifies the logical drives that are  
affected.  
Bad Stripe Drives indicates logical drives that has inaccessible areas.  
Locked Stripe Drives is a reserved field.  
Blocked Drives indicates the logical drives that are blocked. You must  
unblock a blocked drive before you can use it. See “Logical drive state  
Viewing the configuration  
You can select View Configuration from the Main Menu to display the number of  
each logical drive, the size, RAID level, state, stripe-unit size, write policy, read-ahead  
status, and creation date for each logical drive.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the advanced configuration functions  
You can select the Advanced Functions to restore the controller configuration to  
factory default settings, copy the configuration from drives to controller, configure  
BIOS settings, and view the controller and PCI information.  
When you select the Advanced Functions from the Main Menu, the following choices  
appear on the screen.  
Attention:  
Be careful when making selections from this menu. If you change the configuration,  
you might lose data.  
Restore to Factory Default Settings is used to reset the configuration. When you  
reset the configuration, you will not have access to any data stored on the logical  
drives attached to the selected ServeRAID controller.  
This choice deletes the existing configuration information, sets all functional  
physical drives attached to the controller to the Ready state, and deletes all logical  
drives defined for the controller.  
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID controller settings (such as the  
stripe-unit size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or customized values.  
Copy the Configuration from Drives to Controller reads the most common  
configuration from the drives in the system and copies it to the ServeRAID  
controller.  
Configure BIOS Settings is used to modify the BIOS settings, such as the  
Bootable CD-ROM setting, for the ServeRAID controller. (See “Setting the  
Bootable CD-ROM feature” for more information.)  
Note: The Multiple Controller mode for extra BIOS has two settings: Erase and  
Shrink. When this parameter is set to Erase, redundant copies of the  
ServeRAID BIOS are erased. When this parameter is set to Shrink, the  
redundant copies of the ServeRAID BIOS are removed from memory but  
stored in the controller for future use. When you have multiple ServeRAID  
controllers installed, you need only one active copy of ServeRAID BIOS.  
However, to ensure that you have a copy of the ServeRAID BIOS available  
if your active copy becomes defective or unavailable, leave the Multiple  
Controller parameter set to Shrink.  
View Controller and PCI Information shows the ServeRAID controller hardware  
and PCI register information.  
Exit is used to exit from the Mini-Configuration program.  
Setting the Bootable CD-ROM feature: When you attach a CD-ROM drive to the  
ServeRAID controller and set the Bootable CD-ROM feature to Yes, the ServeRAID  
controller will attempt to start a CD that has a bootable startup partition, if no other  
controller in the system is currently using INT13 extensions. Only one controller in the  
system can support the INT13 extensions.  
To enable the Bootable CD-ROM feature:  
1. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration  
program.  
2. Select Configure BIOS Settings from the Advanced Functions menu.  
3. Use the Up Arrow (Ν) and Down Arrow () keys to highlight BIOS Support for  
Bootable CD-ROM then press Enter to change No to Yes.  
132 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Ensure that the screen has Yes next to BIOS Support for Reading Partition  
Tables. If not, use the Up Arrow (Ν) and Down Arrow () keys to highlight BIOS  
Support for Reading Partition Tables; then, press Enter to change No to Yes.  
Note: You must perform this next step to save the new settings.  
5. Highlight Save Configuration to the ServeRAID Controller then, press Enter.  
The program displays an Okaymessage and then returns you to the Main Menu of  
the Mini-Configuration program.  
6. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.  
Running the IPSSEND program  
You can run the IPSSEND program from the operating system command line. When  
you run the IPSSEND program with no parameters, a list of available functions and  
their specific parameters appears. The following instructions are for running the  
IPSSEND program with no parameters. The available functions and their parameters  
are described in the sections that follow:  
To run the IPSSEND program:  
If you are using OS/ 2 or Windows NT:  
1. Type:  
c:\ipsadm\ipssend  
where c is the drive letter of the drive where OS/ 2 or Windows NT is  
installed.  
2. Press Enter.  
If you are using NetWare:  
1. From the console, type:  
load ipssend  
2. Press Enter.  
If you are using DOS:  
1. Insert the startable IPSSEND diskette into diskette drive A; then, type:  
a:\ipssend  
where a is the drive letter of the diskette drive.  
2. Press Enter.  
If you are using Linux, SCO OpenServer, or UnixWare:  
1. Type:  
/usr/bin/ipssend  
2. Press Enter.  
Using the IPSSEND program  
There are five types of IPSSEND functions:  
FlashCopy  
Server roll-out  
Error-recovery  
Problem-isolation and debug  
RAID configuration  
Using IBM ServeRAID 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Server roll-out functions  
The IPSSEND server roll-out functions include the following:  
backup Use the backup function to save a ServeRAID controller configuration and  
BIOS settings to a diskette or to a physical drive. The ServeRAID controller  
configuration must be valid.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend backup controller filename [noprompt]  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
filename is the path and file name where the configuration is to be written  
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt  
copyld Use the copyld function to copy a source logical drive to a target logical drive.  
The size of the target logical drive must be greater than or equal to the size of  
the source logical drive.  
Supported operating system: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend copyld controller source target [noprompt]  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
source is the source logical drive number  
target is the target logical drive number  
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt.  
restore Use the restore function to load a configuration from a file stored on a  
diskette or a hard disk. The configuration must be a valid configuration file  
from the backup option in IPSSEND. This operation overwrites the existing  
configuration information and BIOS settings stored for the ServeRAID  
controller.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend restore controller filename [noprompt]  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
filename is the path and file name where the configuration is to be written  
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt  
init  
Use the init function to initialize the first 0.5 MB of a logical drive. This  
process will erase the partition tables and all data on the disk.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend init controller drivenum [noprompt]  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)  
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt  
134 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
initsync Use the initsync function to initialize and synchronize a logical drive at the  
same time. This command works only on RAID level-1 and level-5 logical  
drives. The command will erase all data on the entire logical drive.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend initsync controller drivenum [noprompt]  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)  
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt  
synch Use the synch function to synchronize the parity information on redundant  
logical drives. If the parity information is inconsistent, the IPSSEND program  
will repair it automatically.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend synch controller drive drivenum  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
scope indicates the number of logical drives:  
— DRIVE is a single logical drive  
— GROUP is a Merge Group  
scopeID specifies the scope item:  
— If DRIVE, specifies the logical drive number (1–8)  
— If GROUP, specifies the Merge Group number  
Error-recovery functions  
The IPSSEND error-recovery functions include the following:  
getstatus  
Use the getstatus function to display the current logical-drive status for the  
most recent rebuild, synchronization, or logical-drive migration. The status  
includes such information as the remaining size of the logical drive, the  
percentage completed for the function in process, and information about the  
most recently completed logical-drive function.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend getstatus controller  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
rebuild Use the rebuild function to rebuild a designated disk drive. This command is  
valid for disk arrays that contain one or more logical drives that are in the  
critical state. Progress is indicated during the rebuild operation, but you can  
also use the getstatus command to obtain progress information about the  
rebuild.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend rebuild controller dch dsid nch nsid  
Using IBM ServeRAID 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
dch is the channel number for the defunct drive (1–3)  
dsid is the SCSI ID for the defunct drive (0–15)  
nch is the channel number for the new drive (1–3)  
nsid is the SCSI ID for the new drive (0–15)  
setstate Use the setstate function to change the state of a physical device from its  
current state to a new state.  
Attention:  
You must be very careful when you use this command. For example, you  
might lose data if you reset a defunct device to online without first  
performing a rebuild operation.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend setstate controller channel sid nstate  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
channel is the channel number for the drive (1–3)  
sid is the SCSI ID for the drive (0–15)  
nstate is the new state for the drive. Valid states are: EMP for Empty, RDY  
for Ready, HSP for Hot spare, SHS for Standby hot spare, DDD for  
Defunct disk drive, DHS for Defunct hot spare, RBL for Rebuild, SBY for  
Standby, and ONL for Online.  
unblock Use the unblock function to gain access to a blocked logical drive. RAID  
level-0 logical drives become blocked if they are in an array that contains  
RAID level-1 or level-5 logical drives and the array is being rebuilt. Because  
the RAID level-0 logical drives cannot be rebuilt, the data stored on the RAID  
level-0 logical drives is damaged and should not be accessed. After you issue  
the unblock command, you must re-create or restore the data previously  
stored on the RAID level-0 logical drives.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend unblock controller drivenum  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)  
Problem-isolation and debug commands  
The IPSSEND problem-isolation and debug commands include the following:  
certify Use the certify function to verify the media of a physical drive. When the  
program finds a media error, it reassigns the sectors. A summary of  
reassignments and PFA errors appears upon completion of the verification.  
Supported operating system: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend certify controller channel sid  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
136 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)  
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)  
eraseevent  
Use the eraseevent function to clear all logged entries in the designated event  
log. See GETEVENT help for information about the contents of the device  
event log and the controller soft and hard event logs.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend eraseevent controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is the designated event log:  
— DEVICE for the device event log  
— SOFT for the ServeRAID controller soft event log  
HARD for the ServeRAID controller hard event log  
getbst Use the getbst function to display the number of bad stripes in the bad stripe  
table for each logical drive.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, Unixware, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend getbst controller  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
fmstatus Use the fmstatus function to display the progress of a format operation  
currently processing.  
Supported operating system: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend fmstatus controller channel sid  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)  
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)  
format Use the format function to perform a low-level format of a physical drive.  
Attention:  
1. When you issue this command, all data on the disk will be lost.  
2. After a format command is issued, do not stop it. If a format process is  
stopped for any reason, the hard disk that was being formatted will not  
respond to any commands except the format command. Thus, the  
ServeRAID controller will not be able to recognize commands anymore.  
Supported operating system: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend format controller channel sid  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)  
Using IBM ServeRAID 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)  
getevent Use the getevent function to display information about various unexpected  
events. IBM uses the soft and hard event logs for development and  
debugging purposes only. The device event log contains event counters for  
each attached physical device. These counters include:  
Parity: An unexpected event occurred while data was being transferred  
on the SCSI bus. This usually indicates a problem with the SCSI cable,  
connectors, or terminators.  
Soft: A SCSI device detected a check-condition event.  
Hard: The SCSI controller detected an unexpected event. The controller is  
the most likely cause.  
Misc: The ServeRAID controller detected an event that was most likely  
caused by the device.  
The device event log also provides Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) alerts,  
which indicate that the device has signaled the ServeRAID controller that it  
might fail in the near future.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend getevent controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is the designated event log:  
— DEVICE for the device event log  
— SOFT for the ServeRAID controller soft event log  
HARD for the ServeRAID controller hard event log  
selftest The selftest function is used to direct a controller or a device to perform its  
self-test.  
Supported operating systems: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend selftest controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is the designated self-test:  
— AD for the ServeRAID controller self-test  
— PD channel sid for the device self-test  
Note: channel represents the drive channel, and sid is the SCSI ID for  
the device.  
startdely Use the startdely function to set the number of drives in a group to start up  
simultaneously and to set the delay in seconds between the startup of these  
groups of drives.  
Supported operating systems: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend startdely controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— ? displays the concurrent drive startup count and the delay time.  
138 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
— A number (1–16) that specifies the new concurrent drive startup  
count  
— A number (1–16) that specifies the new concurrent drive startup  
count and a number (3–15) that specifies the startup delay time, in  
seconds.  
RAID Configuration commands  
The IPSSEND RAID configuration commands include the following:  
drivever Use the drivever function to display the vendor ID, microcode version, and  
serial number of a SCSI device. The IPSSEND program retrieves this  
information directly from the device.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend drivever controller channel sid  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)  
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)  
getconfig  
Use the getconfig function to display the ServeRAID controller configuration  
information. This includes information about the firmware version; initiator  
ID and rebuild rate; logical-drive status, RAID level, and size; and physical  
device type, SCSI ID, and PFA error.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend getconfig controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— AD for the controller information  
— LD for the logical drive information  
— PD for the physical device information  
— AL for all information. This is the default option.  
hsrebuild  
Use the hsrebuild function to turn on the ServeRAID controller hot-swap  
rebuild feature or display the current status of the hot-swap rebuild feature.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend hsrebuild controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— ON enables the hot-swap feature  
— ? displays the status of the hot-swap rebuild feature.  
readahead  
Use the readahead function to enable, disable, or set the adaptive mode for  
the read-ahead feature of the ServeRAID controller.  
Using IBM ServeRAID 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supported operating systems: Windows NT and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend readahead controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— ON enables the read-ahead feature  
— OFF disables the read-ahead feature  
— ADAPTIVE indicates that the controller will determine the best mode  
to use at any given time.  
— ? displays the current read-ahead feature mode being used.  
stripesize  
Use the stripesize function to set the size of the ServeRAID controller's stripe  
to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB.  
Supported operating systems: DOS  
Command:  
ipssend stripesize controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— 8 to set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB  
— 16 to set the stripe-unit size to 16 KB  
— 32 to set the stripe-unit size to 32 KB  
— 64 to set the stripe-unit size to 64 KB  
— ? to display the current stripe-unit size being used  
unattended  
Use the unattended command to enable or disable the unattended feature of  
the ServeRAID controllers.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux,  
OpenServer, Unixware, and DOS  
Command:  
ipssend unattended controller options  
where:  
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)  
options is one of the following:  
— ON to enable the feature  
— OFF to disable the feature  
— ? to display the current setting of this feature  
Starting the IPSMON program  
You can run the IPSMON program from the operating system command line.  
To start the IPSMON program:  
If you are using OS/ 2 or Windows NT:  
1. Type:  
c:\ipsadm\ipsmon  
where c is the drive letter of the drive where OS/ 2 or Windows NT is  
installed.  
140 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Press Enter.  
If you are using Novell NetWare:  
1. From the console, type:  
load ipsmon  
2. Press Enter.  
If you are using Linux, SCO OpenServer, or UnixWare:  
1. Type:  
/usr/bin/ipsmon  
2. Press Enter.  
Using the IPSMON program  
When you start the IPSMON monitoring program, it immediately begins polling all  
ServeRAID controllers for specific conditions. If a condition being monitored is  
found, this program logs a message to the screen, to a file, or to both the screen and a  
file.  
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/ 2, NetWare, Linux, OpenServer,  
UnixWare  
Command:  
ipsmon options  
where:  
options is one of the following optional parameters:  
— -F:filename to specify the name of the file in which to record messages. The  
default file name is IPSMON.LOG.  
— -S to display messages on the standard output (usually the monitor)  
— -? to obtain a current list of valid parameters  
Note: If you start this program without any command-line parameters, the  
IPSMON program will log the messages to the IPSMON.LOG file, and the  
messages will not appear on the screen.  
After you start the IPSMON program, the program will continuously poll the  
ServeRAID controllers until you take one of the following actions:  
If you are using Windows NT or OS/ 2, press Ctrl+C.  
If you are using NetWare, type unload ipsmonat the system console.  
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare, press the Del key to cancel the  
program.  
During operation, the program will log various messages. Each message will contain  
an alert code and a location specifier.  
The alert code begins with the message type and number; for example, INF,  
WRN, or CRT (followed by the message number).  
The location specifier comes after the alert code:  
A followed by the controller number  
SID followed by the SCSI ID (if required)  
C followed by the channel number (if required)  
For example, a message of CRTxxx:A2C3SID04signifies that a Critical condition  
(CRTxxx) was found on Controller 2 (A2), Channel 3 (C3), SCSI ID 4 (SID04).  
Using IBM ServeRAID 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The IPSMON program can log the following messages, based on the required  
condition.  
Information Messages:  
<Date and Time> INF000:A1C-SID-- no errors detected  
<Date and Time> INF001:A1C-SID-- rebuild started  
<Date and Time> INF002:A1C-SID-- rebuild completed  
<Date and Time> INF003:A1C-SID-- synchronization started  
<Date and Time> INF004:A1C-SID-- synchronization completed  
<Date and Time> INF005:A1C-SID-- migration started  
<Date and Time> INF006:A1C-SID-- migration completed  
Warning Messages:  
<Date and Time> WRN001:A2C3SID12 PFA Error detected  
Critical Messages:  
<Date and Time> CRT001:A3C2SID04 dead drive detected  
<Date and Time> CRT002:A1C-SID-- not responding to commands  
142 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom-to-FRU index  
This index supports xSeries 250 servers.  
Notes:  
1. Check the configuration before you replace a FRU. Configuration problems can  
cause false errors and symptoms.  
2. The default configuration can be loaded by starting the system and then pressing  
the reset button four times, waiting 15 seconds between each press. Once the  
configuration has reset to the default, it must be saved in Setup to be stored in  
CMOS.  
3. For IBM devices not supported by index, refer to the manual for that device.  
The Symptom-to-FRU lists symptoms, errors, and the possible causes. The most  
likely cause is listed first. Use this Symptom-to-FRU index to help you decide which  
FRUs to have available when servicing the computer. The POST BIOS displays POST  
error codes and messages on the screen.  
Beep symptoms  
Beep symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses  
(intervals without sound). See the following examples.  
Note: One beep after successfully completing POST indicates the system is  
functioning properly.  
Beeps  
Description  
1-2-3  
One beep  
A pause (or break)  
Two beeps  
A pause (or break)  
Three Beeps  
4
Four continuous beeps  
Beep/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
1-1-3 (CMOS write/ read  
1. Battery  
test failed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1-1-4 (BIOS EEPROM  
checksum failed)  
1-2-1 (Programmable  
Interval Timer failed)  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1-2-2 (DMA initialization  
failed)  
1-2-3 (DMA page register  
write/ read failed)  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Beep/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
1-2-4 (RAM refresh  
1. DIMM  
verification failed)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Memory Card  
1. DIMM  
1-3-1 (1st 64K RAM test  
failed)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Memory Card  
1. DIMM  
1-3-2 (1st 64K RAM parity  
test failed)  
2. I/ O Legacy board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2-1-1 (Secondary DMA  
register failed)  
2-1-2 (Primary DMA  
register failed)  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2-1-3 (Primary interrupt  
mask register failed)  
2-1-4 (Secondary interrupt  
mask register failed)  
2-2-2 (Keyboard controller 1. I/O Legacy Board  
failed)  
2. Keyboard  
2-2-3 (CMOS power failure 1. Battery  
and checksum checks  
2. I/ O Legacy board  
failed)  
2-2-4 (CMOS configuration 1. Battery  
info validation failed)  
2. I/ O Legacy board  
2-3-1 (Screen initialization  
1. Jumper on J6  
failed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy board  
2-3-2 (Screen memory  
failed)  
2-3-3 (Screen retrace failed) 1. I/O Legacy board  
2-3-4 (Search for video  
ROM failed)  
1. I/O Legacy board  
1. I/O Legacy board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2-4-1 (Video failed, screen  
believed operable)  
3-1-1 (Timer tick interrupt  
failed)  
3-1-2 (Interval timer channel 1. I/O Legacy Board  
2 failed)  
3-1-3 (RAM test failed  
1. DIMM  
above address OFFFF h))  
2. Memory card  
3. Processor/ PCI board  
4. I/ O Legacy board  
1. Battery  
3-1-4 (Time-Of-Day clock  
failed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy board  
3-2-1 (Serial port failed)  
144 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beep/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
3-2-2 (Parallel port failed)  
1. I/O Legacy board  
3-2-3 (Math coprocessor  
failed)  
1. Optional processor (if installed)  
2. Processor  
3. Processor/ PCI board  
1. DIMM  
3-2-4 (Failure comparing  
CMOS memory size against  
actual)  
2. Processor/ PCI board  
3. Battery  
4. I/ O Legacy board  
1. DIMM  
3-3-1 (Memory size  
mismatch occurred, see  
"Memory Settings" on page  
49)  
2. Processor/ PCI board  
3. Battery  
3-3-2 (Critical SMBUS error 1. Disconnect the server power cord from outlet, wait 30  
occurred)  
seconds and retry.  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
4. DIMMs  
5. Memory Card  
6. DASD Backplane  
7. Power Supply  
8. Power Supply Backplane  
9. 12C Cable  
3-3-3 (No operational  
memory in system)  
1. Install or reseat the memory modules, then power-on the  
2. If problem persists, restart the system 3 times.  
Note: Restarting the system three times will load default  
settings.  
3. DIMMs  
4. Memory Board  
5. Processor/ PCI Board  
6. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Diagnostics  
2. Run Configuration/ Setup  
Two Short Beeps  
(Information only, the  
configuration has changed)  
Three Short Beeps  
1. DIMM  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor  
One Continuous Beep  
2. Optional Processor (if installed)  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
Symptom-to-FRU index 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beep/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
Repeating Short Beeps  
1. Keyboard  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
One Long and One Short  
Beep  
1. Video adapter (if present)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
One Long and Two Short  
Beeps  
1. Video adapter (if present)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
Two Long and Two Short  
Beeps  
1. Video adapter  
No beep symptoms  
No Beep Symptom  
FRU/Action  
No beep and the system 1. Diagnostic LED Panel  
operates correctly.  
No Beeps occur after  
successfully completing  
POST (The Power-On  
Status is disabled.)  
1. Run Configuration/Setup, set the Start Options Power-On  
Status to enable.  
2. Diagnostic LED Panel  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Check the power cord.  
No ac power (Power  
supply ac LED is off)  
2. Power Supply (If two are installed, swap them to determine  
if one is defective.)  
3. Power Backplane  
No beep and no video  
System will not power-  
up (Power supply ac  
LED is on)  
Diagnostic panel LEDs  
The system error LED is turned on when an error is detected. If the system error LED  
is on, remove the cover and check the diagnostic panel LEDs. The following is a  
complete list of diagnostic panel LEDs followed by the FRU/ Action for correcting the  
problem.  
Note: If a diagnostic panel LED is on and the information LED panel system error  
LED is off, there is probably an LED problem. Run LED diagnostics.  
Notes:  
1. To locate the LEDs on the processor board see “Processor board component  
2. Check the System Error Log for additional information before replacing a FRU.  
3. It may be necessary to view the system error log from a remote connection, such  
as MOST.  
146 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. The memory card DIMM error LEDs, processor error LEDs, and VRM error LEDs  
turn off when the system is powered down.  
Diagnostic Panel LED  
FRU/Action  
All LEDs off  
1. System Error Log is 75% full; clear the log.  
(Check System Error Log  
for error condition, then  
clear System Error Log  
when the problem is  
found.)  
2. Bad, missing or mis-installed processor terminator; remove  
and reinsert terminator.  
3. PFA alert; check log for failure; clear PFA alert; remove AC  
power for at least 20 seconds, reconnect, then power up  
system.  
4. If failure reading I2C device, check devices on bus "X"; see  
5. Run Information Panel diagnostics.  
1. Processor 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
CPU LED on  
(The LED next to the failing  
CPU should be on.)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board.  
VRM LED on  
1. Corresponding voltage regulator module.  
(The LED next to the failing  
VRM should be on.)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board.  
DASD LED on  
1. Be sure the fans are operating correctly and the air flow is  
(Check amber drive LED  
for a failing hard drive.)  
good.  
2. Failing drive.  
3. SCSI Backplane.  
FAN LED on  
1. Check individual fan LEDs.  
2. Replace respective fan.  
3. Fan Cable.  
4. Processor/ PCI Board.  
5. I/ O Legacy Board.  
6. Power Backplane Board.  
1. Failing DIMM(s) in slot J1-J16.  
2. Memory Card.  
MEM LED on (The LED  
next to the failing DIMM is  
on.)  
3. Processor/ PCI Board.  
1. Reboot the system.  
2. Check the System Error Log.  
NMI LED on  
PCI A LED on  
1. PCI Card in slot 1 or 2. See “Processor board component  
2. Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board.  
PCI B LED on  
1. Card in slots 3-6.See “Processor board component  
2. Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.  
3. Processor/ PCI Board.  
4. I/ O Legacy Board.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic Panel LED  
PCI C LED on  
FRU/Action  
1. Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.  
2. Processor/ PCI Board.  
3. I/ O Legacy Board.  
PS1 LED on  
PS2 LED on  
PS3 LED on  
PS4 LED on  
1. Check the DC Good LED on power supply 1. If off,  
replace power supply 1.  
2. Power Backplane.  
1. Check the DC Good LED on power supply 2. If off,  
replace power supply 2.  
2. Power Backplane.  
1. Check the DC Good LED on power supply 3. If off,  
replace power supply 3.  
2. Power Backplane.  
1. Check the DC Good LED on power supply 4. If off,  
replace power supply 4.  
2. Power Backplane.  
SMI LED on  
1. Reboot the system.  
TEMP LED on  
1. Ambient temperature must be within normal operating  
2. Ensure fans are operating correctly.  
3. Examine System Error Log.  
a. System over recommended temperature  
1)  
Information LED Panel  
2) I/ O Legacy Board  
b. DASD over recommended temperature (DASD LED  
also on)  
1) Overheating hard drive  
2) DASD Backplane  
3) I/ O Legacy Board  
c. System over recommended temperature for CPU X  
(where X is CPU 1, 2, 3, or 4) (CPU LED also on)  
1) CPU X  
2) Processor/ PCI Board  
d. I/ O Legacy Board over recommended temperature  
1) Processor/ PCI Board  
2) I/ O Legacy Board  
Diagnostic error codes  
Note: In the following error codes, if XXX is 000, 195, or 197 do not replace a FRU.  
The description for these error codes are:  
000  
195  
197  
The test passed.  
The Esc key was pressed to abort the test.  
This is a warning error and may not indicate a hardware failure.  
148 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For all error codes, replace/ follow the FRU/ Action indicated.  
Error Code/Symptom FRU/Action  
001-XXX-000 (Failed core tests) 1. Processor/PCI Board  
001-XXX-001 (Failed core tests) 1. Processor/PCI Board  
001-250-000 (Failed System  
1. Processor/PCI Board  
Board ECC)  
001-250-001 (Failed Processor  
1. Processor/PCI Board  
Board ECC)  
005-XXX-000 (Failed Video test) 1. Video Adapter (if installed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
011-XXX-000 (Failed COM1  
Serial Port test)  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
1. I/ O Legacy Board  
011-XXX-001 (Failed COM2  
Serial Port test)  
014-XXX-000 (Failed Parallel  
Port test)  
015-XXX-001 (USB interface not 1. I/O Legacy Board.  
found. Board damaged.)  
015-XXX-015 (Failed USB  
1. Make sure parallel port is not disabled.  
External Loopback Test)  
2. Re-run USB External Loopback Test.  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
015-XXX-198 (USB device  
connected during USB test)  
1. Remove USB devices from USB1 and USB2.  
2. Re-run test.  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
020-XXX-000 (Failed PCI  
Interface test)  
1. Processor/PCI Board  
2. System Board  
020-XXX-001 (Failed Hot-Swap 1. PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly  
Slot 1 PCI Latch test)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
020-XXX-002 (Failed Hot-Swap 1. PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly  
Slot 2 PCI Latch test)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
020-XXX-003 (Failed Hot-Swap  
1. PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly  
Slot 3 PCI Latch test)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
020-XXX-004 (Failed Hot-Swap 1. PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly  
Slot 4 PCI Latch test)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
030-XXX-000 (Failed Internal  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
SCSI interface test)  
030-XXX-00N (Failed SCSI test 1. Adapter  
on PCI slot N. Check system  
error log before replacing a  
FRU.)  
035-XXX-099  
1. No adapters were found.  
2. If adapter is installed re-check connection.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
035-XXX-S99 (Failed RAID test 1. Cable  
on PCI slot S. S = number of  
2. SCSI Backplane  
3. Adapter  
failing PCI slot. Check System  
Error Log before replacing a  
FRU.)  
035-XXX-SNN (Check System  
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI ID NN on RAID adapter in  
Error Log before replacing a  
PCI slot S.  
FRU.  
S = number of failing  
PCI slot; NN = SCSI ID of  
failing fixed disk.)  
035-253-S99 (RAID adapter  
initialization failure)  
1. ServeRAID Adapter in slot S is not configured  
properly. Obtain the basic and extended configuration  
status and refer to the ServeRAID Hardware  
Maintenance Manual for more information.  
2. Cable  
3. SCSI Backplane  
4. Adapter  
075-XXX-000 (Failed Power  
1. Power Supply  
Supply test)  
089-XXX-001 (Failed  
Microprocessor test)  
1. VRM for Microprocessor 1  
2. Microprocessor  
089-XXX-002 (Failed Optional  
Microprocessor test)  
1. VRM for Optional Microprocessor 2  
2. Optional Microprocessor  
089-XXX-003 (Failed Optional  
Microprocessor test)  
1. VRM for Optional Microprocessor 3  
2. Optional Microprocessor  
089-XXX-004 (Failed Optional  
Microprocessor test)  
1. VRM for Optional Microprocessor 4  
2. Optional Microprocessor  
165-XXX-000 (Failed Service  
1. Check error log for any I2C messages (see “I2C bus  
Processor test)  
2. Remove ac power from system for 20 seconds, then  
rerun service processor test. If problem persists,  
proceed to step 3..  
3. I/ O Legacy Board. Before replacing the I/ O Legacy  
Board, ensure that I/ O Legacy Board jumper J28 is not  
installed (the default) when the error occurs.  
180-XXX-000 (Diagnostics LED 1. Run Diagnostic LED test for the failing LED.  
failure)  
180-XXX-001 (Failed  
information LED panel test)  
1. Information LED Panel  
2. Diagnostic LED Panel  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Diagnostics LED Panel  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. System Board  
180-XXX-002 (Failed  
Diagnostics LED Panel test)  
180-XXX-003 (Failed System  
Board LED test)  
180-XXX-004 (Failed Processor  
1. Processor/PCI Board  
Board LED test)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
150 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
180-XXX-005 (Failed SCSI  
1. SCSI Backplane  
Backplane LED test)  
2. SCSI Backplane Cable  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Memory Board  
180-XXX-006 (Memory Board  
LED test)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
201-XXX-0NN (Failed Memory 1. DIMM Location J1-J16  
test, see "Memory Settings" on  
page 49.) NN = DIMM location.  
2. Memory card  
201-XXX-999 (Multiple DIMM 1. See error text for failing DIMMs  
failure, see error text.)  
2. Memory card  
202-XXX-001 (Failed System  
1. VRM 1  
Cache test)  
2. Microprocessor CPU 1  
1. VRM 2  
202-XXX-002 (Failed System  
Cache test)  
2. Microprocessor CPU 2  
1. VRM 3  
202-XXX-003 (Failed System  
Cache test)  
2. Microprocessor CPU 3  
1. VRM 4  
202-XXX-004 (Failed System  
Cache test)  
2. Microprocessor CPU 4  
1. Cable  
206-XXX-000 (Failed Diskette  
Drive test)  
2. Diskette Drive  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. CD-ROM Drive Cables  
2. CD-ROM Drive  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
215-XXX-000 (Failed IDE CD-  
ROM test)  
217-XXX-000 (Failed BIOS Fixed 1. Fixed Disk 1  
Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-001 (Failed BIOS  
1. Fixed Disk 2  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-002 (Failed BIOS  
1. Fixed Disk 3  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
217-XXX-003 (Failed BIOS  
Fixed Disk test)  
1. Fixed Disk 4  
1. Fixed Disk 5  
1. Fixed Disk 6  
1. Fixed Disk 7  
1. Fixed Disk 8  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-004 (Failed BIOS  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-005 (Failed BIOS  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-006 (Failed BIOS  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-007 (Failed BIOS  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-008 (Failed BIOS Fixed 1. Fixed Disk 9  
Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
217-XXX-009 (Failed BIOS  
1. Fixed Disk 10  
Fixed Disk test)  
Note: If RAID is configured,  
the fixed disk number  
refers to the RAID  
logical array.  
152 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
264-XXX-0NN (NN = SCSI ID  
1. Tape Cartridge, if user executed the Read/Write Tape  
of failing Tape Drive)  
Drive test (XXX = 256)  
2. SCSI or power cable connected to the tape drive with  
SCSI ID NN  
3. Tape drive with SCSI ID NN – refer to Help and  
Service Information appendix of tape drives User  
Guide.  
4. I/ O Legacy Board or SCSI Controller – run SCSI  
Controller diagnostic to determine of SCSI bus is  
functioning properly.  
264-XXX-999 (Errors on  
multiple tape drives, see error  
text for more info)  
1. See error messages/text in the PC Doctor error log for  
detailed information on each individual tape drive  
error.  
301-XXX-000 (Failed Keyboard 1. Keyboard  
test)  
405-XXX-000 (Failed Ethernet  
test on controller on the I/ O  
Legacy Board)  
1. Verify that Ethernet is not disabled in BIOS.  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
405-XXX-00N (Failed Ethernet 1. Adapter in PCI slot N.  
test on adapter in PCI slot N)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
Note: Insure modem is  
present and attached to  
server.  
415-XXX-000 (Failed Modem  
1. Cable  
test)  
2. Modem  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
Error symptoms  
Error Symptom  
FRU/Action  
CD is not working properly.  
1. Clean the CD.  
2. Run CD-ROM diagnostics.  
3. CD-ROM Drive  
CD-ROM drive tray is not  
working. (The server must be  
powered-on.)  
1. Insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray-  
release opening.  
2. Run CD-ROM diagnostics.  
3. CD-ROM Drive  
CD-ROM drive is not recognized. 1. Run Configuration/Setup, enable primary IDE  
channel.  
2. Check cables and jumpers.  
3. Check for correct device driver.  
4. Run CD-ROM diagnostics.  
5. CD-ROM drive  
6. I/ O Legacy Board  
Symptom-to-FRU index 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error Symptom  
FRU/Action  
Power switch does not work and  
reset button does work.  
1. Verify that the power-on control jumper on J23 is  
on pins 1 and 2.  
2. Power Switch Assembly  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
Diskette drive in-use light stays  
on, or the system bypasses the  
diskette drive, or the diskette  
drive does not work.  
1. If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:  
a. The diskette drive is enabled in the  
Configuration/ Setup utility program.  
b. The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try  
another diskette if you have one.)  
c. The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.  
d. The diskette contains the necessary files to  
start the server.  
e. The software program is OK.  
f. Cable is installed correctly (proper orientation)  
2. Run Diskette Drive Diagnostics.  
3. Cable  
4. Diskette Drive  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
Monitor problems (general).  
Some IBM monitors have their  
own self-tests. If you suspect a  
problem with the monitor, refer to  
the information that comes with  
the monitor for adjusting and  
testing instructions.  
1. Monitor  
2. Run Video Diagnostics. If diagnostics pass, the  
problem may be a video driver.  
3. Display Adapter / I/ O Legacy Board  
Power supply LED errors  
Use the power supply LED information on the following page to troubleshoot power  
supply problems.  
Note: The minimum configuration required for the DC Good light to come on is:  
Power Supply  
Power Backplane  
Processor/ PCI Board (with pins 2 and 3 on J23 connected together to  
bypass the power switch; see “Processor board jumpers” on page 57).  
Processor/ PCI Board (Verify that Processor/ PCI Board and I/ O Legacy  
Board are properly connected together; see “Processor board component  
AC Good  
LED  
DC Good  
Description  
FRU/Action  
LED  
Off  
Off  
No power to system or 1. Check ac power to system.  
ac problem.  
2. Power Supply  
154 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AC Good  
LED  
DC Good  
LED  
Description  
FRU/Action  
On  
Off  
Standby mode or dc  
problem.  
1. Move jumper on J23 to pins 2-3 to  
bypass power control. If the DC  
Good LED comes on, press  
Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Watch the screen  
for any POST errors. Check the  
System Error Log for any listed  
problems.  
If  
the system powers up with no  
errors:  
a. Power Switch Assembly  
2. Remove the adapters and  
disconnect the cables and power  
connectors to all internal and  
external devices. Power-on the  
system. If the DC Good LED  
comes on, replace the adapters and  
devices one at a time until you  
isolate the problem.  
3. Power Supply  
4. Power Backplane  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
6. Processor Board  
N/ A  
On  
On  
Power is OK.  
POST error codes  
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
062 (Three consecutive boot  
failures using the default  
configuration.)  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Battery  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
4. Processor/ PCI Board  
5. Processor  
101, 102 (System and processor  
error)  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
106 (System and processor error) 1. I/O Legacy Board  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
111 (Channel check error)  
1. Failing adapter  
2. DIMM  
3. I/ O Legacy board  
114 (Adapter read-only memory 1. Failing adapter  
error)  
2. Run diagnostics  
Symptom-to-FRU index 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
129 (Internal cache error)  
1. Processor  
2. Optional processor (if installed)  
3. Processor/ PCI board  
1. Run Diagnostics  
2. Battery  
151 (Real time clock error)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Battery  
161 (Real time clock battery  
error)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Battery  
162 (Device Configuration  
Error)  
Note: Be sure to load the  
default settings and any  
additional desired  
3. Failing Device  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
settings; then, save the  
configura-tion.  
163 (Real-Time Clock error)  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Battery  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. DIMM  
164 (Memory configuration  
changed, see "Memory Settings"  
on page 49.)  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
175 (Hardware error)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
3. C2 Security Switch  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
176 (Computer cover or cable  
cover was removed without a  
key being used)  
177, 178 (Security hardware  
error)  
184 (Power-on password  
corrupted)  
185 (Drive startup sequence  
information corrupted)  
186 (Security hardware control  
logic failed)  
187 (VPD serial number not set.) 1. Set serial number in Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
188 (Bad EEPROM CRC #2)  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
189  
(An attempt 1. Run Configuration/Setup, enter the administrator  
was made to access the server  
with invalid passwords)  
password  
2. I/ O Legacy Board.  
156 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
1. Run memory diagnostics.  
201 (Memory test error, see  
"Memory Settings" on page 49.)  
If the server does not have the  
latest level of BIOS installed,  
update the BIOS to the latest  
level and run the diagnostic  
program again.  
2. DIMM  
3. Memory card  
4. Processor/ PCI Board  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
229 (Cache error)  
1. Processor  
2. Optional Processor (if installed)  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
289 (DIMM has been disabled by 1. Run Configuration/Setup, if disabled by user  
user or system, see "Memory  
2. Disabled DIMM, if not disabled by user.  
Settings" on page 49.)  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
301 (Keyboard or keyboard  
1.  
Keyboard  
controller error)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
303 (Keyboard controller error) 1. I/O Legacy Board  
2. Keyboard  
602 (Invalid diskette boot  
1. Diskette  
record)  
2. Diskette Drive  
3. Cable  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup and Diagnostics  
2. Diskette Drive  
3. Drive Cable  
604 (Diskette drive error)  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Diskette drive  
2. Drive cable  
605 (Unlock error)  
3. I/ O Legacy board  
662 (Diskette drive configuration 1. Run Configuration/Setup and Diagnostics  
error)  
2. Diskette Drive  
3. Drive Cable  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
762 (Coprocessor configuration  
error)  
1. Run Configuration/Setup utility  
2. Battery  
3. Processor  
4. Processor/ PCI board  
1. Disconnect external cable on parallel port.  
2. Run Configuration/ Setup  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
962 (Parallel port error)  
11XX (System board serial port 1 1. Disconnect external cable on serial port.  
or 2 error)  
2. Run Configuration/ Setup  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
Symptom-to-FRU index 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
1301 (cable to front panel not  
1. Cable  
found)  
2. Front Panel  
3. Power Switch Assembly  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Cable  
1302 (cable from system board  
to power on and reset switches  
not found)  
2. Power Switch Assembly  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1303 (cable from system board to 1. Cable  
power backplane not found)  
2. Power Backplane  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Cable  
1304 (cable to diagnostic LED  
board not found)  
2. Diagnostic LED Board  
3. Power Switch Assembly  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
1600 (The Service Processor is  
not functioning) Do the  
following before replacing a  
FRU:  
1. Ensure that a jumper is not  
installed on J51.  
2. Remove the ac power to the  
system, wait 20 seconds;  
then, re-connect the ac  
power. Wait 30 seconds;  
then, power-on the system.  
1601 (The system is able to  
communicate to the Service  
Processor, but the Service  
1. I/O Legacy Board  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
Processor failed to respond at the  
start of POST.) Do the following  
before replacing a FRU:  
1. Remove the ac power to the  
system, wait 20 seconds;  
then, re-connect the ac  
power. Wait 30 seconds;  
then, power-on the system.  
2. Flash update the Service  
Processor.  
1762 (Fixed Disk Configuration  
error)  
1. Fixed Disk Drive  
2. Fixed Disk Cables  
3. Run Configuration/ Setup  
4. Fixed Disk Adapter  
5. SCSI Backplane  
6. I/ O Legacy Board  
158 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
178X (Fixed Disk error)  
1. Fixed Disk Cables  
2. Run Diagnostics  
3. Fixed Disk Adapter  
4. Fixed Disk Drive  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
1800 (No more hardware  
interrupt available for PCI  
adapter)  
1. Run Configuration/ Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1962 (Drive does not contain a  
1. Verify a bootable operating system is installed.  
valid boot sector)  
2. If RAID system, refer to the IBM ServeRAID  
Hardware Maintenance Manual for more  
information.  
3. Run Diagnostics  
4. Hard Disk Drive  
5. Cable  
6. SCSI Backplane  
7. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Video Adapter (if installed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Video Adapter (if installed)  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. CD-ROM Drive  
3. CD-ROM Power Cable  
4. IDE Cable  
2400 (Video controller test  
failure)  
2462 (Video memory  
configuration error)  
5962 (IDE CD-ROM  
configuration error)  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
6. Battery  
8603 (Pointing Device Error)  
1. Pointing Device  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor  
00012000 (Machine check  
architecture error)  
2. Optional Processor  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
1. VRM 1  
00019501 (Processor 1 is not  
functioning - check VRM and  
processor LEDs)  
2. Processor 1  
3. Processor Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. VRM 2  
00019502 (Processor 2 is not  
functioning - check VRM and  
processor LEDs)  
2. Processor 2  
3. Processor Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
Symptom-to-FRU index 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
00019503 (Processor 3 is not  
functioning - check VRM and  
processor LEDs)  
1. VRM 3  
2. Processor 3  
3. Processor Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. VRM 4  
00019504 (Processor 4 is not  
functioning - check VRM and  
processor LEDs)  
2. Processor 4  
3. Processor/ PCI Board  
4. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor 1  
00019701 (Processor 1 failed  
BIST)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor 2  
00019702 (Processor 2 failed  
BIST)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor 3  
00019703 (Processor 3 failed  
BIST)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Processor 4  
00019704 (Processor 4 failed  
BIST)  
2. Processor/ PCI Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
00180100 (No room for PCI  
option ROM)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
00180200 (No more I/ O space  
available for PCI adapter)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
00180300 (No more memory  
(above 1MB for PCI adapter)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
00180400 (No more memory  
(below 1MB for PCI adapter)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Remove Failing PCI Card  
2. I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Run Configuration/Setup  
2. Failing Adapter  
00180500 (PCI option ROM  
checksum error)  
00180600 (PCI device built-in  
self test failure)  
3. I/ O Legacy Board  
00180700, 00180800 (General PCI 1. I/O Legacy Board  
error)  
2. PCI Card  
01295085 (ECC checking  
1. Processor/PCI Board  
hardware test error)  
2. Processor  
160 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code/Symptom  
FRU/Action  
01298001 (No update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 1)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 1  
01298002 (No update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 2)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 2  
01298003 (No update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 3)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 3  
01298004 (No update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 4)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 4  
01298101 (Bad update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 1)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 1  
01298102 (Bad update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 2)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 2  
01298103 (Bad update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 3)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 3  
01298104 (Bad update data for  
1. Ensure all processors are the same stepping level  
processor 4)  
and cache size.  
2. Processor 4  
I9990301 (Fixed boot sector  
1. Hard Disk Drive  
error)  
2. If RAID system, refer to the ServeRAID Hardware  
Maintenance Manual for more information.  
3. SCSI Backplane  
4. Cable  
5. I/ O Legacy Board  
I9990305 (Fixed boot sector  
error, no operating system  
installed)  
1. Install operating system to hard disk drive.  
I9990650 (AC power has been  
1. Check cable  
restored)  
2. Check for interruption of power supply  
3. Power Cable  
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes  
The ISPR (Interrupt Status Port Register), BCS (Basic Configuration Status), and ECS  
(Extended Configuration Status) codes identify the controller state.  
Note: Do not replace a system board containing a ServeRAID adapter unless such a  
replacement is a specifically recommended Action.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error procedures  
The ISPR Error Procedures list errors, symptoms, and the possible causes. The most  
probable cause is listed first. Use these procedures to help you solve ServeRAID  
problems when servicing the computer.  
EF10 (Default ISPR)  
1. No ISPR Error Present.  
1XXX (Microcode Checksum Error)  
1. Replace the ServeRAID controller.  
2XXX thru 5XXX (Code DRAM Error)  
1. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations, see  
2. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/ Firmware from the IBM  
Website.  
3. Remove the jumpers.  
4. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.  
6XXX (Cache DRAM Error)  
1. Reseat Cache Memory SIMM.  
2. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations, see  
3. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/ Firmware from the IBM  
Website.  
4. Remove the jumpers.  
5. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.  
7XXX thru 8XXX (Host/ Local PCI Bus Interface Error)  
1. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations,  
2. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/ Firmware from the IBM  
Website.  
3. Remove the jumpers.  
4. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.  
9XXX thru BXXX (SCSI bus error caused either by defective drives, termination, etc.)  
1. Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables  
from suspect card, and reboot.  
CAUTION:  
Do not press F5. Doing so changes the customers configuration.  
If an ISPR error is still present, perform the following actions until the error is no  
longer present:  
a. Reseat the controller.  
b. Replace the controller.  
Notes:  
a. The controller detects a configuration change. Do not choose Save  
Changes.Instead, press F10 to bypass any options to this effect.  
2. If ISPR error is EF10 after disconnecting cables:  
162 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by the second digit of the original  
ISPR code:  
ISPR = B1xx = Channel 1  
ISPR = B2xx = Channel 2  
ISPR = B3xx = Channel 1 and 2  
ISPR = B4xx = Channel 3  
ISPR = B5xx = Channel 1 and 3  
ISPR = B6xx = Channel 2 and 3  
ISPR = B7xx = Channel 1, 2 and 3  
ISPR = BFxx = Channel not identified  
b. Confirm that the channel(s) identified from the error in step 2 is(are) the cause  
of the error by verifying that the error presents itself ONLY when the  
offending channel is reconnected.  
c. Check termination of identified channel.  
d. Check for proper backplane jumper configuration.  
e. Check for proper cabling configuration in systems that use DASD status  
cables. Reconnect all cables removed in step 1 above.  
f. Disconnect one drive at a time attached to the channel identified in step 2a,  
then reboot to determine which drive is causing the error.  
g. Replace SCSI cable.  
h. Replace SCSI backplane.  
EF10 (Default ISPR)  
1. No ISPR error present.  
2. Controller is probably functioning properly. Do not replace system board unless  
you have run the controller s diagnostics and you get an error message. If you do  
not get an error message, assume it is functioning properly.  
3. Refer to “Using IBM ServeRAID” on page 117. Note the resulting BCS and or  
ECS Error codes, and see the FRU actions respective to those codes. (EF10 is a  
default code for ISPR indicating that there is no ISPR error present.)  
EFFE (Firmware code corrupted or download jumpers are in place.)  
1. Verify download jumpers are in their default locations. See “Processor board  
component locations” on page 55 for jumper locations.  
2. If download jumpers are not in place and error still persists, then flash the  
controller firmware with the jumpers in place; then remove the jumpers.  
3. If error persists after step 2 , replace the controller or the system board with  
integrated controller.  
FFFF or other code not listed  
1. Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables  
attached to the suspect controller and reboot. If ISPR code is EF10 after  
disconnecting cables, follow the steps below until the error is eliminated:  
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by reconnecting cables one at a  
time and rebooting until the error returns.  
b. Check termination of identified channel in step a..  
c. Disconnect one drive at a time attached to channel identified in stepa. and  
reboot each time to determine which drive is causing the problem.  
d. Replace SCSI Cable attached to channel identified in step a..  
e. Replace Backplane attached to channel identified in step a..  
Symptom-to-FRU index 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. If original ISPR code is still present after disconnecting all SCSI cables and  
rebooting, perform the following actions until the error is no longer present:  
Reseat the controller.  
Replace the controller.  
ServeRAID  
This index supports ServeRAID 3HB Adapters and Controllers. It lists symptoms,  
errors, and possible causes.  
Note: Do not replace any FRU until you have followed the POST (ISPR) error  
Only replace a ServeRAID 3HB Adapter or controller if ind8icated to do so in  
the POST (ISPR) error procedures.  
Error Code/Symptom  
1xxx (flash checksum error)  
2xxx (code DRAM error)  
Action  
1. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
2601 to 260B (POST detected error with  
ServeRAID subsystem)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
2610 (POST detected error with  
ServeRAID controller hardware)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
2620 (POST detected ServeRAID  
configuration or hard disk error)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
3xxx (NVRAM error)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
4xxx (timer/ cache memory controller  
error)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
5xxx (cache memory controller error)  
6xxx (cache DRAM error)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
1. Reseat Cache Memory SIMM  
2. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
3. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
164 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Code/Symptom  
Action  
7xxx (host/ local PCI bus interface error) 1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
8xxx (SCSI I/ O port error)  
1. Install download jumpers, flash latest level  
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove  
jumpers.  
2. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
9xxx (SCSI termination error)  
2. SCSI cable  
3. SCSI backplane  
4. Hard drive  
5. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
Axxx (SCSI I/ O port error)  
Bxxx (SCSI bus interface error)  
2. SCSI cable  
3. SCSI backplane  
4. Hard drive  
5. ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/ Controller  
SCSI error codes  
Error Code  
FRU/Action  
All SCSI Errors One or more of the following  
might be causing the problem:  
1. External SCSI devices must be  
powered-on before you power-on the  
server.  
A failing SCSI device (adapter, drive,  
controller)  
2. The cables for all external SCSI devices  
are connected correctly.  
An improper SCSI configuration or SCSI  
termination jumper setting  
3. If you have attached an external SCSI  
device to the server, make sure the  
external SCSI termination is set to  
automatic.  
Duplicate SCSI IDs in the same SCSI chain  
A missing or improperly installed SCSI  
terminator  
4. The last device in each SCSI chain is  
terminated correctly.  
A defective SCSI terminator  
An improperly installed cable  
A defective cable  
5. The SCSI devices are configured  
correctly.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Temperature error messages  
Message  
Action  
DASD "X" Over Temperature (level-  
critical; Direct Access Storage Device bay  
"X" was over temperature)  
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled;  
DASD Over recommended Temperature 1. Ensure system is being properly cooled;  
(sensor X) (level-warning; the DASD  
backplane had an over temperature  
condition)  
DASD under recommended temperature 1. Ambient temperature must be within  
(sensor X) level-warning; the DASD  
backplane had an under temperature  
condition)  
normal operating specifications; (see  
Power Supply "X" Temperature Fault  
(level-critical; power supply "x" had over  
temperature condition)  
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled;  
2. Replace Power Supply "X"  
System board is over recommended  
temperature (level-warning; system board  
is over recommended temperature)  
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled;  
2. Replace system board  
System board is under recommended  
temperature (level-warning; system board  
is under recommended temperature)  
1. Ambient temperature must be within  
normal operating specifications; (see  
System over temperature for CPU"X"  
(level-warning; CPU "X" reporting over  
temperature condition)  
1. Ensure system is being properly cooled;  
2. Replace CPU "X".  
3. Replace Processor/ PCI Board.  
System under recommended CPU "X"  
temperature (level-warning; system  
reporting under temperature condition for  
CPU "X")  
1. Ambient temperature must be within  
normal operating specifications; (see  
2. Replace CPU "X".  
3. Replace Processor/ PCI Board.  
Fan error messages  
Message  
Action  
Fan "X" failure (level-critical; fan "X" had a 1. Check connections to fan "X"  
failure)  
2. Replace fan "X"  
Fan "X" fault (level-critical; fan "X" beyond 1. Check connections to fan "X"  
recommended RPM range)  
2. Replace fan "X"  
166 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Power error messages  
Message  
Action  
Power supply "X" current fault (level-critical; 1. See “Power checkout” on page 32.  
excessive current demand on power supply  
"X")  
Power supply "X" DC good fault (level-  
critical; power good signal not detected for  
power supply "X")  
1. Replace power supply "X"  
Power supply "X" fan fault (level-critical; fan 1. Replace power supply "X"  
fault in power supply "X")  
Power supply "X" fault (level-critical;  
overcurrent condition exists)  
Power supply "X" 12V fault (level-critical;  
overcurrent condition detected)  
Power supply "X" 3.3V fault  
(level-critical; 3.3V power supply "X" had an  
error)  
Power supply "X" 5V fault (level-critical; 5V  
power supply "X" had an error)  
System over recommended "X" current  
(level-non-critical; system running too much  
current on that voltage)  
System running non-redundant power  
(level-non-critical; system does not have  
redundant power)  
1. Add another power supply  
2. Remove options from system  
3. System can continue to operate without  
redundancy protection if 1 and 2 above  
are not followed.  
System under recommended voltage for "X"  
v (level-warning; indicated voltage supply  
under nominal value; value for "X" can be +12,  
-12, or +5)  
1. Check connections to power  
subsystem  
2. Replace power supply  
3. Replace power backplane  
System under recommended voltage on 3.3 v 1. Check connections to power  
(level-warning; 3.3 volt supply under nominal  
value)  
subsystem  
2. Replace power supply  
3. Replace power backplane  
System under recommended X current (level- 1. See “Power checkout” on page 32.  
non-critical; system drawing less current than  
recommended on voltage "X")  
"X" V bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent  
condition on "X" voltage bus)  
12V "X" bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent  
condition on 12 volt "X" voltage bus)  
5V fault (level-critical; overcurrent condition  
on 5 V subsystem)  
240 VA bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent or 1. See “Power checkout” on page 32.  
overvoltage condition in power subsystem)  
Symptom-to-FRU index 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System shutdown  
Refer to the following tables when experiencing system shutdown related to voltage  
or temperature problems.  
Power related system shutdown  
Message  
Action  
System powered off due to "X" current over 1. See “Power checkout” on page 32.  
max value (level-critical; system drawing too  
much current on voltage "X" bus)  
System shutoff due to "X" current under min 1. See “Power checkout” on page 32.  
value (level-critical; current on voltage bus  
"X" under minimum value)  
System shutoff due to "X" V over voltage  
(level-critical; system shutoff due to "X"  
supply over voltage)  
1. Check power supply connectors  
2. Replace power supply  
3. Replace power backplane  
1. Check power supply connectors  
2. Replace power supply  
System shutoff due to "X" V under voltage  
(level-critical system shutoff due to "X"  
supply under voltage)  
3. Replace power backplane  
System powered off due to faults on each  
power supply.  
Temperature related system shutdown  
Message  
Action  
System shutoff due to board over temperature 1. Ensure system is being properly  
(level-critical; processor board is over  
temperature)  
2. Replace processor board  
System shutoff due to CPU "X" over  
temperature (level-critical; CPU "X" is over  
temperature)  
1. Ensure system is being properly  
2. Replace CPU "X"  
System shutoff due to CPU "X" under  
temperature (level-critical; CPU "X" is under  
temperature)  
1. Ambient temperature must be within  
normal operating specifications (see  
2.  
System shutoff due to DASD temperature  
(sensor X) (level-critical; DASD area reported  
temperature outside recommended operating  
range)  
1. Ensure system is being properly  
168 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Message  
Action  
System shutoff due to high ambient  
temperature (level-critical; high ambient  
temperature)  
1. Ambient temperature must be within  
normal operating specifications (see  
System shutoff due to system board under  
temperature (level-critical; system board is  
under temperature)  
1. Ambient temperature must be within  
normal operating specifications (see  
DASD checkout  
Message  
Action  
Hard drive (SCSI ID "X") removal detected  
(level-critical; hard drive "X" has been  
removed)  
1. Information only, take action as  
appropriate.  
Hard drive (SCSI ID "X") fault  
1. Replace hard drive (SCSI ID "X").  
Host Built-In Self Test (BIST) checkout  
Message  
Action  
1. Reseat CPU  
Host BIST fail (level-informational; host’s  
built-in self test failed)  
2. Reseat VRM  
3. Replace CPU  
I2C bus fault messages  
Message  
Action  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 0.  
1. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 1.  
1. Reseat I/ O Legacy Board  
2. Reseat power supplies  
3. Replace power supply  
4. Replace Power Backplane  
5. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
Symptom-to-FRU index 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Message  
Action  
1. Reseat front panel connector  
2. Reseat diagnostics panel connector  
3. Reseat I/ O Legacy Board  
4. Replace front panel  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 2.  
5. Replace diagnostics panel  
6. Replace Power Backplane  
7. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Reseat VRMs  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 3.  
2. Reseat Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Replace VRMs  
4. Replace Processor/ PCI Board  
5. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 4.  
1. Reseat Power Backplane/ DASD power  
cable  
2. Reseat I/ O Legacy Board  
3. Replace Power Backplane/ DASD power  
cable  
4. Replace DASD Backplane  
5. Replace Power Backplane  
6. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Reseat CPUs  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 5.  
2. Reseat Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Replace CPUs  
4. Replace Processor/ PCI Board  
5. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Reseat memory card  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 6.  
2. Reseat Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Replace memory card  
4. Replace Processor/ PCI Board  
5. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Reseat Processor/ PCI Board  
2. Replace Processor/ PCI Board  
3. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
1. Replace I/ O Legacy Board  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 7.  
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices  
on bus 8.  
Undetermined problems  
You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify the failure, the Devices List  
is incorrect, or the system is inoperative.  
170 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notes:  
1. A corrupt CMOS can cause undetermined problems.  
2. A faulty I2C Bus can cause undetermined problems. Check the system error log  
for any I2C Bus errors; see “I2C bus fault messages” on page 169.  
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies, see“Power supply LED errors” on page  
154. If the LEDs indicate the power supplies are working correctly, return here and do  
the following:  
1. Power-off the computer.  
2. Be sure the system is cabled correctly.  
3. Remove or disconnect the following (one at a time) until you find the failure  
(power-on the computer and reconfigure each time).  
Any external devices  
Surge suppressor device (on the computer)  
Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices  
Each adapter  
Hard disk drives  
Memory-Modules (Minimum requirement = 512 MB (4x128 MB DIMMs))  
Note: Minimum operating requirements are:  
a. 1 Power Supply  
b. Power Backplane  
c. Processor/ PCI Board (with pins 2 and 3 on J23 connected together to  
bypass the power switch; default is pins 1 and 2)  
d. I/ O Legacy Board (Verify that connection to Processor/ PCI Board is  
secure.)  
e. 1 Microprocessor and VRM  
f. 3 Terminator Cards  
g. Memory Modules (with a minimum of 1 bank of four 128 MB DIMMs  
(4x128))  
4. Power-on the computer. If the problem remains, suspect the following FRUs in  
the order listed:  
Power Supply  
Power Backplane  
Processor/ PCI Board  
I/ O Legacy Board  
Notes:  
1. If the problem goes away when you remove an adapter from the system, and  
replacing that adapter does not correct the problem, suspect the Processor/ PCI  
Board, then the I/ O Legacy Board.  
2. If you suspect a networking problem and all the system tests pass, suspect a  
network cabling problem external to the system.  
Symptom-to-FRU index 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts listing (Type 8665)  
Part A  
1
2
3
A
14  
13  
12  
4
11  
10  
5
6
7
8
9
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System  
Note: Components of the shuttle (A) are shown in “Part Bon page 175.  
Index  
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y  
DASD fan assembly w/ bracket (All models)  
LVD SCSI backplane (Audi) (All models)  
Power supply backplane assembly (Models 61Y, 71Y, 81Y)  
Hot swap power supply 250W (All models)  
Power supply filler assembly (2) (All models)  
Chassis (All models)  
FRU No.  
37L6314  
24P4003  
37L6329  
36L8819  
00N6405  
37L6316  
37L6335  
37L0198  
00N6407  
19K1517  
76H4091  
37L0260  
37L6328  
37L6327  
06P5959  
06P5955  
19K1231  
06P5981  
09N7764  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front bezel (All models)  
8
Hard disk drive bezel filler assembly (All models)  
Blank 5.25 bezel assembly (All models)  
40X CD-ROM (All models)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1.44MB diskette drive (All models)  
Trim bezel (All models)  
Front LED card assembly (All models)  
Diagnostic switch card (All models)  
Media trim bezel assembly (All models)  
Bezel assembly (All models)  
Bezel (All models)  
Front door (Models 61Y, 71Y, 81Y)  
Power switch cover (All models)  
174 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Part B  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12  
9
10  
11  
Parts listing (Type 8665) 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System  
Index  
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y  
Terminator card (All models)  
FRU No.  
94H0598  
24P1631  
19K0982  
19K0983  
23P1421  
24P6804  
37L6340  
1
2
3
3
3
4
5
Memory card (All models)  
700MHZ/ 1MB cache (Models 6RY, 61Y)  
700MHZ/ 2MB cache (Models 7RY, 71Y)  
900MHZ/ 2MB cache (Models 8RY, 81Y)  
Dual voltage regulator module assembly (All models)  
Misc. processor kit (Models 1RY, 2RY) (contains processor guide (2),  
VRM guide (8), VRM guide retainer (4), memory card guide (2)) (All  
models)  
6
7
I/ O legacy label (All models)  
37L6318  
37L6337  
37L6325  
37L6320  
06P4117  
37L6324  
37L6326  
10L6936  
37L6319  
36L8791  
00N6412  
00N6776  
Processor/ PCI board with backerplate assembly (All models)  
Rear fan assembly w/ bracket (All models)  
Shuttle (All models)  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
I/ O Legacy card assembly w/ backerplate (Snark) (All models)  
Front fan assembly w/ bracket (All models)  
I/ O fan assembly w/ bracket (All models)  
Processor terminator case (All models)  
Processor retention bracket (All models)  
40X CD-ROM (2nd source) (All models)  
CD-ROM 5.25 rail (All models)  
Misc. hot swap kit #2 (Model 1RY, 2RY) (contains PCI handles (4),  
blank fillers (4), PCI clamps (4), M3x5 screw (5), insulator (5), switch  
housing (1), card guide (2), guide retainers) (All models)  
Misc. hot plug kit (All models)  
33L3707  
12J3063  
00N6794  
00N6795  
03K9083  
37L6317  
37L6322  
37L6323  
37L0178  
00N6830  
12J3065  
00N6839  
33L3114  
33L3116  
33L3118  
33L3120  
06P5973  
33F8354  
37L0126  
37L0132  
37L0130  
37L0147  
37L0149  
Top cover (All models)  
Left EIA side flange assembly (All models)  
Right EIA side flange assembly (All models)  
Cam handle lever (All models)  
Shuttle eject lever (All models)  
PCI handle (All models)  
EMI shield (All models)  
PCI switch card (All models)  
PCI switch, single (All models)  
Bracket, floppy disk drive (All models)  
Slide assembly  
128MB DIMM (4) (All models)  
256MB DIMM (All models)  
512MB DIMM (All models)  
1GB DIMM (All models)  
Service label (All models)  
Battery (All models)  
Shuttle power cable (All models)  
Power cable-power backplane to SCSI backplane (All models)  
Power cable-power backplane to CD (All models)  
Signal cable-power backplane to SCSI backplane (All models)  
Signal cable-power backplane to 5.25 bays (All models)  
176 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y  
Signal cable diskette drive (All models)  
FRU No.  
37L0144  
37L0146  
06P5975  
37L0134  
37L0136  
37L0131  
Signal cable-power backplane to CD-ROM (All models)  
Signal cable (All models)  
Power cable-processor to rear processor (All models)  
Power cable-processor to front fans (All models)  
Power cable-power backplane to hard disk drive fans (All models)  
Keyboards  
Keyboard  
FRU No.  
US English  
French Canadian  
LA Spanish  
Arabic  
Belgium/ French  
Belgium/ UK  
Bulgarian  
Czech  
Danish  
Dutch  
French  
German  
Greek  
Hebrew  
Hungarian  
Korean  
Iceland  
Italy  
Norwegian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Romanian  
Russian  
Serbian/ Cyrillic  
Slavic  
37L2551  
37L2552  
37L2553  
37L2555  
37L2556  
37L2557  
37L2558  
37L2559  
37L2560  
37L2561  
37L2562  
37L2563  
37L2564  
37L2565  
37L2566  
02K0901  
37L2567  
37L2568  
37L2569  
37L2570  
37L2571  
37L2572  
37L2573  
37L2574  
37L2575  
37L2576  
37L2577  
37L2578  
37L2579  
37L2580  
37L2581  
37L2582  
37L2583  
37L2585  
37L2587  
37L0913  
Spanish  
Swedish/ Finn  
Swiss, F/ G  
Turkish  
Turkish  
UK English  
Yugosl/ Lat  
US English-EMEA  
Chinese/ US  
Thailand  
French Canadian  
Parts listing (Type 8665) 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power cords  
Power cord  
FRU No.  
01K9851  
01K9853  
12J5120  
12J5122  
12J5124  
12J5126  
12J5128  
China (PRC)  
Japan  
Thailand  
Israel  
Bangladesh, Burma, India, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka  
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia  
Argentina, Australia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay,  
Uruguay, Western Samoa  
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji,  
Ghana, Hong Kong, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia,  
Malta, Nepal, Nigeria, Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore,  
Tanzania, Uganda, United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia  
12J5987  
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin,  
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep.,  
Chad, Czech Republic, Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana,  
Germany, Greece, Guinea, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory  
Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau, Malagasy, Mali,  
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco, Mozambique,  
Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal,  
Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo,  
Tunisia, Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire,  
Zimbabwe  
55H6643  
Denmark, Switzerland, Liechtenstein  
55H6646  
76H4865  
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman  
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El  
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Korea  
(South), Liberia, Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,  
Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West  
Indies), Venezuela  
United States of America  
6952301 (110) 1838574  
(220) 36L8886  
(220V/ 15A)  
178 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Related service information  
Note: The service procedures are designed to help you isolate problems. They are  
written with the assumption that you have model-specific training on all  
computers, or that are familiar with the computers, functions, terminology,  
and service information provided in this manual.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety information  
The following section contains the safety information that you need to be familiar  
with before servicing an IBM mobile computer.  
General safety  
Follow these rules to ensure general safety:  
Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after  
maintenance.  
When lifting any heavy object:  
1. Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.  
2. Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.  
3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to  
lift.  
4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles; this action removes  
the strain from the muscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift any objects that  
weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) or objects that you think are too heavy for you.  
Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer, or that makes the  
equipment unsafe.  
Before you start the machine, ensure that other service representatives and the  
customer's personnel are not in a hazardous position.  
Place removed covers and other parts in a safe place, away from all personnel,  
while you are servicing the machine.  
Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over  
it.  
Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine.  
Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If your hair  
is long, fasten it.  
Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a  
nonconductive clip, approximately 8 centimeters (3 inches) from the end.  
Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses, or metal fasteners for your  
clothing.  
Remember: Metal objects are good electrical conductors.  
Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering, drilling soldering, cutting wire,  
attaching springs, using solvents, or working in any other conditions that might  
be hazardous to your eyes.  
After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards, labels, and ground wires.  
Replace any safety device that is worn or defective.  
Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer.  
Electrical safety  
CAUTION:  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables can be  
180 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
hazardous. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the attached  
power cords, telecommunication systems, networks, and modems before you open  
the server covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration  
procedures.  
Observe the following rules when working on electrical equipment.  
Important: Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have  
handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when  
working with live electrical currents.  
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubber floor mats that  
contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges. Do  
not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.  
Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or  
electrical outlet. If an electrical accident occurs, you can then operate the switch  
or unplug the power cord quickly.  
Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has  
hazardous voltages.  
Disconnect all power before:  
— Performing a mechanical inspection  
— Working near power supplies  
— Removing or installing main units  
Before you start to work on the machine, unplug the power cord. If you cannot  
unplug it, ask the customer to power-off the wall box that supplies power to the  
machine and to lock the wall box in the off position.  
If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits, observe the  
following precautions:  
— Ensure that another person, familiar with the power-off controls, is near you.  
Remember: Another person must be there to switch off the power, if  
necessary.  
— Use only one hand when working with powered-on electrical equipment;  
keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back.  
Remember: There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock. By  
observing the above rule, you may prevent a current from passing through  
your body.  
— When using testers, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe  
leads and accessories for that tester.  
— Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally, if necessary) to insulate you  
from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames.  
Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages;  
these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information. Use  
extreme care when measuring high voltages.  
Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational  
condition.  
Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.  
Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. First, check that it  
has been powered-off.  
Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area. Examples of these  
hazards are moist floors, nongrounded power extension cables, power surges,  
and missing safety grounds.  
Related service information 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental  
mirror. The surface is conductive; such touching can cause personal injury and  
machine damage.  
Do not service the following parts with the power on when they are removed  
from their normal operating places in a machine:  
— Power supply units  
— Pumps  
— Blowers and fans  
— Motor generators  
and similar units. (This practice ensures correct grounding of the units.)  
If an electrical accident occurs:  
— Use caution; do not become a victim yourself.  
— Switch off power.  
— Send another person to get medical aid.  
Safety inspection guide  
The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe  
conditions on these products. Each machine, as it was designed and built, had  
required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury. This  
guide addresses only those items. However, good judgment should be used to  
identify potential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBM features or options not  
covered by this inspection guide.  
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determine how serious the apparent  
hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem.  
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present:  
Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primary voltage on the frame can  
cause serious or fatal electrical shock).  
Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitor  
Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware  
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a checklist. Begin the checks with  
the power off, and the power cord disconnected.  
Checklist:  
1. Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, or sharp edges).  
2. Power-off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.  
3. Check the power cord for:  
a. A third-wire ground connector in good condition. Use a meter to measure  
third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground  
pin and frame ground.  
b. The power cord should be the appropriate type as specified in the parts  
listings.  
c. Insulation must not be frayed or worn.  
4. Remove the cover.  
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety  
of any non-IBM alterations.  
182 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,  
contamination, water or other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.  
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.  
8. Check that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not been  
removed or tampered with.  
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices  
Any computer part containing transistors or integrated circuits (ICs) should be  
considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when  
there is a difference in charge between objects. Protect against ESD damage by  
equalizing the charge so that the machine, the part, the work mat, and the person  
handling the part are all at the same charge.  
Notes:  
1. Use product-specific ESD procedures when they exceed the requirements noted  
here.  
2. Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use have been certified (ISO 9000)  
as fully effective.  
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:  
Keep the parts in protective packages until they are inserted into the product.  
Avoid contact with other people.  
Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to eliminate static on your body.  
Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most clothing is insulative and  
retains a charge even when you are wearing a wrist strap.  
Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide a static-free work surface.  
The mat is especially useful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.  
Select a grounding system, such as those listed below, to provide protection that  
meets the specific service requirement.  
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirable but not required to protect  
against ESD damage.  
— Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground, ground braid, or green-wire  
ground.  
— Use an ESD common ground or reference point when working on a double-  
insulated or battery-operated system. You can use coax or connector-outside  
shells on these systems.  
— Use the round ground-prong of the ac plug on ac-operated computers.  
Grounding requirements  
Electrical grounding of the computer is required for operator safety and correct  
system function. Proper grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a  
certified electrician.  
Safety notices (multi-lingual translations)  
The caution and danger safety notices in this section are provided in the following  
languages:  
English  
Brazilian/ Portuguese  
Related service information 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chinese  
French  
German  
Italian  
Korean  
Spanish  
Important: All caution and danger statements in this IBM documentation begin with  
a number. This number is used to cross reference an English caution or  
danger statement with translated versions of the caution or danger  
statement in this section.  
For example, if a caution statement begins with a number 1, translations  
for that caution statement appear in this section under statement 1.  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements before performing any  
of the instructions.  
Statement 1  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone and communication cables is hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance,  
or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.  
Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.  
Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this  
product.  
When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.  
Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or  
structural damage.  
Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks,  
and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in  
the installation and configuration procedures.  
Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when  
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices.  
To Connect  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
To Disconnect  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Statement 2  
184 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an  
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a  
module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type  
made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if  
not properly used, handled, or disposed of.  
Do not:  
Throw or immerse into water  
Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)  
Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Statement 3  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD-ROM drives, fiber optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts  
inside the device.  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER: Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following:  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view  
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the  
beam.  
Statement 4  
Related service information 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 kg (37 lbs)  
CAUTION:  
32 kg (70.5 lbs)  
55 kg (121.2 lbs)  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply  
do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might  
have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from the device,  
ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.  
2
1
Statement 10  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg (180 lbs.) on top of rack-mounted  
devices.  
186 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Importante:  
Todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo da IBM documentation começam com um  
número. Este número é utilizado para fazer referência cruzada de uma instrução de  
cuidado ou perigo no idioma inglês com as versões traduzidas das instruções de  
cuidado ou perigo encontradas nesta seção.  
Por exemplo, se uma instrução de cuidado é iniciada com o número 1, as traduções  
para aquela instrução de cuidado aparecem nesta seção sob a instrução 1.  
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar  
qualquer operação.  
Instrução 1  
PERIGO  
A corrente elétrica proveniente de cabos de alimentação, de telefone e de  
comunicações é perigosa.  
Para evitar risco de choque:  
Não conecte ou desconecte cabos e não realize instalação, manutenção ou  
reconfiguração deste produto durante uma tempestade com raios.  
Conecte todos os cabos de alimentação a tomadas elétricas corretamente  
instaladas e aterradas.  
Conecte todos os equipamentos ao qual esse produto será conectado a tomadas  
corretamente instaladas.  
Sempre que possível, utilize apenas uma das mãos para conectar ou desconectar  
cabos de sinal.  
Nunca ligue qualquer equipamento quando existir evidência de danos por fogo,  
água ou na estrutura.  
Desconecte cabos de alimentação, sistemas de telecomunicação, redes e modems  
antes de abrir as tampas dos dispositivos, a menos que especificado de maneira  
diferente nos procedimentos de instalação e configuração.  
Conecte e desconecte cabos conforme descrito na seguinte tabela, ao instalar ou  
movimentar este produto ou os dispositivos conectados, ou ao abrir suas tampas.  
Para Conectar:  
1. DESLIGUE Tudo.  
Para Desconectar:  
1. DESLIGUE Tudo.  
2. Primeiramente, conecte todos os cabos  
aos dispositivos.  
2. Primeiramente, remova os cabos de  
alimentação das tomadas.  
3. Conecte os cabos de sinal aos  
conectores.  
3. Remova os cabos de sinal dos conectores.  
4. Remova todos os cabos dos dispositivos.  
4. Conecte os cabos de alimentação às  
tomadas.  
5. LIGUE os dispositivos.  
Related service information 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrução 2  
CUIDADO:  
Ao substituir a bateria de lítio, utilize apenas uma bateria IBM, Número de Peça  
33F8354 ou uma bateria de tipo equivalente, recomendada pelo fabricante. Se o seu  
sistema possui um móídulo com uma bateria de lítio, substitua-o apenas pelo mesmo  
tipo de mídulo, do mesmo fabricante. A bateria contém lítio e pode explodir se não for  
utilizada, manuseada e descartada de maneira correta.  
Não:  
Jogue ou coloque na água  
Aqueça a mais de 100°C (212°F)  
Conserte nem desmonte  
Para descartar a bateria, entre em contato com a área de atendimento a clientes IBM,  
pelo telefone (011) 889-8986, para obter informações sobre como enviar a bateria pelo  
correio para a IBM.  
Instrução 3  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
Quando produtos a laser (unidades de CD-ROM, unidades de DVD, dispositivos de  
fibra ítica, transmissores, etc.) estiverem instalados, observe o seguinte:  
Não remova as tampas. A remoção das tampas de um produto a laser pode  
resultar em exposição prejudicial à radiação de laser. Nenhuma peça localizada  
no interior do dispositivo pode ser consertada.  
A utilização de controles ou ajustes ou a execução de procedimentos diferentes  
dos especificados aqui pode resultar em exposição prejudicial à radiação.  
PERIGO  
Alguns produtos a laser contêm um diodo laser da Classe 3A ou Classe 3B embutido.  
Observe o seguinte:  
Radiação de laser quando aberto. Não olhe diretamente para o raio a olho nu ou com  
instrumentos íticos, e evite exposição direta ao raio.  
Instrução 4  
188 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 kg (37 lbs)  
CUIDADO:  
32 kg (70,5 lbs)  
55 kg (121,2 lbs)  
Ao levantar a máquina, faça-o com segurança.  
Instrução 5  
CUIDADO:  
Os botões Liga/ Desliga localizados no dispositivo e na fonte de alimentação não  
desligam a corrente elétrica fornecida ao dispositivo. O dispositivo também pode ter  
mais de um cabo de alimentação. Para remover toda a corrente elétrica do dispositivo,  
assegure que todos os cabos de alimentação estejam desconectados da fonte de  
energia elétrica.  
2
1
CUIDADO:  
Instrução 10  
CUIDADO:  
Não coloque nenhum objeto com peso superior a 82 kg (180 lbs.) sobre dispositivos  
montados em rack.  
Related service information 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related service information 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related service information 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related service information 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related service information 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important:  
Toutes les consignes Attention et Danger indiquées dans la bibliothèque IBM  
documentation sont précédées d'un numéro. Ce dernier permet de mettre en  
correspondance la consigne en anglais avec ses versions traduites dans la présente  
section.  
Par exemple, si une consigne de type Attention est précédée du chiffre 1, ses  
traductions sont également précédées du chiffre 1 dans la présente section.  
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et Danger avant de  
procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.  
Notice n° 1  
DANGER  
Le courant électrique passant dans les câbles de communication, ou les cordons  
téléphoniques et d'alimentation peut être dangereux.  
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique:  
Ne manipulez aucun câble et n'effectuez aucune opération d'installation,  
d'entretien ou de reconfiguration de ce produit au cours d'un orage.  
Branchez tous les cordons d'alimentation sur un socle de prise de courant  
correctement câblé et mis à la terre.  
Branchez sur des socles de prise de courant correctement câblés tout équipement  
connecté à ce produit.  
Lorsque cela est possible, n'utilisez qu'une seule main pour connecter ou  
déconnecter les câbles d'interface.  
Ne mettez jamais un équipement sous tension en cas d'incendie ou d'inondation,  
ou en présence de dommages matériels.  
Avant de retirer les carters de l'unité, mettez celle-ci hors tension et déconnectez  
ses cordons d'alimentation, ainsi que les câbles qui la relient aux réseaux, aux  
systèmes de télécommunication et aux modems (sauf instruction contraire  
mentionnée dans les procédures d'installation et de configuration).  
Lorsque vous installez ou que vous déplacez le présent produit ou des  
périphériques qui lui sont raccordés, reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous  
pour connecter et déconnecter les différents cordons.  
198 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connexion  
connexion  
1. Mettez les unités hors tension.  
1. Mettez les unités hors tension.  
2. Commencez par brancher tous les  
cordons sur les unités.  
2. Débranchez les cordons d'alimentation  
des prises.  
3. Branchez les câbles d'interface sur des  
connecteurs.  
3. Débranchez les câbles d'interface des  
connecteurs.  
4. Branchez les cordons d'alimentation sur 4. Débranchez tous les câbles des unités.  
des prises.  
5. Mettez les unités sous tension.  
Notice n° 2  
ATTENTION:  
Remplacez la pile au lithium usagée par une pile de référence identique  
exclusivement - voir la référence IBM - ou par une pile équivalente recommandée  
par le fabricant. Si votre système est doté d'un module contenant une pile au  
lithium, vous devez le remplacer uniquement par un module identique, produit  
par le même fabricant. La pile contient du lithium et présente donc un risque  
d'explosion en cas de mauvaise manipulation ou utilisation.  
Ne la jetez pas à l'eau.  
Ne l'exposez pas à une température supérieure à 100 ° C.  
Ne cherchez pas à la réparer ou à la démonter.  
Pour la mise au rebut, reportez-vous à la réglementation en vigueur.  
Notice n° 3  
ATTENTION:  
Si des produits laser sont installés (tels que des unités de CD-ROM ou de DVD,  
des périphériques contenant des fibres optiques ou des émetteurs-récepteurs),  
prenez connaissance des informations suivantes:  
N'ouvrez pas ces produits pour éviter une exposition directe au rayon laser.  
Vous ne pouvez effectuer aucune opération de maintenance à l'intérieur.  
Pour éviter tout risque d'exposition au rayon laser, respectez les consignes de  
réglage et d'utilisation des commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites dans  
le présent document.  
DANGER  
Related service information 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certains produits laser contiennent une diode laser de classe 3A ou 3B. Prenez  
connaissance des informations suivantes:  
Rayonnement laser lorsque le carter est ouvert. évitez de regarder fixement le  
faisceau ou de l'observer à l'aide d'instruments optiques. évitez une exposition  
directe au rayon.  
Notice n° 4  
18 kg  
ATTENTION:  
32 kg  
55 kg  
Faites-vous aider pour soulever ce produit.  
Notice n° 5  
ATTENTION:  
Le bouton de mise sous tension/hors tension de l'unité et l'interrupteur  
d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation ne coupent pas l'arrivée de courant  
électrique à l'intérieur de la machine. Il se peut que votre unité dispose de  
plusieurs cordons d'alimentation. Pour isoler totalement l'unité du réseau  
électrique, débranchez tous les cordons d'alimentation des socles de prise de  
courant.  
2
1
Notice n° 10  
200 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ATTENTION:  
Ne posez pas d'objet dont le poids dépasse 82 kg sur les unités montées en armoire.  
Related service information 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wichtig:  
Alle Sicherheitshinweise in dieser IBM documentation beginnen mit einer Nummer.  
Diese Nummer verweist auf einen englischen Sicherheitshinweis mit den übersetzten  
Versionen dieses Hinweises in diesem Abschnitt.  
Wenn z. B. ein Sicherheitshinweis mit der Nummer 1 beginnt, so erscheint die  
übersetzung für diesen Sicherheitshinweis in diesem Abschnitt unter dem Hinweis 1.  
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.  
Hinweis 1  
VORSICHT  
Elektrische Spannungen von Netz-, Telefon- und Datenübertragungsleitungen sind  
gefährlich.  
Aus Sicherheitsgründen:  
Bei Gewitter an diesem Gerät keine Kabel anschließen oder lösen. Ferner keine  
Installations-, Wartungs- oder Rekonfigurationsarbeiten durchführen.  
Gerät nur an eine Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit ordnungsgemäß geerdetem  
Schutzkontakt anschließen.  
Alle angeschlossenen Geräte ebenfalls an Schutzkontaktsteckdosen mit  
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem Schutzkontakt anschließen.  
Signalkabel möglichst einhändig anschließen oder lösen.  
Keine Geräte einschalten, wenn die Gefahr einer Beschädigung durch Feuer,  
Wasser oder andere Einflüsse besteht.  
Die Verbindung zu den angeschlossenen Netzkabeln,  
Telekommunikationssystemen, Netzwerken und Modems ist vor dem öffnen des  
Gehäuses zu unterbrechen. Es sei denn, dies ist in den zugehörigen Installations-  
und Konfigurationsprozeduren anders angegeben.  
Nur nach den nachfolgend aufgeführten Anweisungen arbeiten, die für  
Installation, Transport oder öffnen von Gehäusen von Personal Computern oder  
angeschlossenen Einheiten gelten.  
Kabel anschlieβen:  
Kabel lösen:  
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten und  
Netzstecker ziehen.  
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten.  
2. Zuerst Netzstecker von Steckdose lösen.  
3. Signalkabel von Anschlußbuchsen lösen.  
4. Alle Kabel von Einheiten lösen.  
2. Zuerst alle Kabel an Einheiten  
anschließen.  
3. Signalkabel an Anschlußbuchsen  
anschließen.  
4. Netzstecker an Steckdose anschließen.  
5. Gerät einschalten.  
Hinweis 2  
202 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACHTUNG:  
Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine Batterie mit der IBM Teilenummer 33F8354  
oder durch eine vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen. Wenn Ihr System ein  
Modul mit einer Lithium-Batterie enthält, ersetzen Sie es immer mit dem selben  
Modultyp vom selben Hersteller. Die Batterie enthält Lithium und kann bei  
unsachgemäßer Verwendung, Handhabung oder Entsorgung explodieren.  
Die Batterie nicht:  
mit Wasser in Berührung bringen.  
über 100 C erhitzen.  
reparieren oder zerlegen.  
Die örtlichen Bestimmungen für die Entsorgung von Sondermüll beachten.  
Hinweis 3  
ACHTUNG:  
Wenn ein Laserprodukt (z. B. CD-ROM-Laufwerke, DVD-Laufwerke, Einheiten mit  
Glasfaserkabeln oder Transmitter) installiert ist, beachten Sie folgendes.  
Das Entfernen der Abdeckungen des CD-ROM-Laufwerks kann zu gefährlicher  
Laserstrahlung führen. Es befinden sich keine Teile innerhalb des CD-ROM-  
Laufwerks, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden müssen. Die Verkleidung des CD-  
ROM-Laufwerks nicht öffnen.  
Steuer- und Einstellelemente sowie Verfahren nur entsprechend den  
Anweisungen im vorliegenden Handbuch einsetzen. Andernfalls kann  
gefährliche Laserstrahlung auftreten.  
VORSICHT  
Manche CD-ROM-Laufwerke enthalten eine eingebaute Laserdiode der Klasse 3A  
oder 3B. Die nachfolgend aufgeführten Punkte beachten.  
Laserstrahlung bei geöffneter Tür. Niemals direkt in den Laserstrahl sehen, nicht  
direkt mit optischen Instrumenten betrachten und den Strahlungsbereich meiden.  
Hinweis 4  
Related service information 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 kg  
ACHTUNG:  
32 kg  
55 kg  
Beim Anheben der Maschine die vorgeschriebenen Sicherheitsbestimmungen  
beachten.  
Hinweis 5  
ACHTUNG:  
Mit dem Betriebsspannungsschalter an der Vorderseite des Servers und dem  
Betriebsspannungsschalter am Netzteil wird die Stromversorgung für den Server  
nicht unterbrochen. Der Server könnte auch mehr als ein Netzkabel aufweisen. Um  
die gesamte Stromversorgung des Servers auszuschalten, muß sichergestellt werden,  
daß alle Netzkabel aus den Netzsteckdosen herausgezogen wurden.  
2
1
Hinweis 10  
ACHTUNG:  
Keine Gegenstände, die mehr als 82 kg wiegen, auf Rack-Einheiten ablegen.  
204 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Importante:  
Tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo riportati nella pubblicazione IBM  
documentation iniziano con un numero. Questo numero viene utilizzato per  
confrontare avvisi di attenzione o di pericolo in inglese con le versioni tradotte  
riportate in questa sezione.  
Ad esempio, se un avviso di attenzione inizia con il numero 1, la relativa versione  
tradotta è presente in questa sezione con la stessa numerazione.  
Prima di eseguire una qualsiasi istruzione, accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di  
attenzione e di pericolo.  
Avviso 1  
PERICOLO  
La corrente elettrica circolante nei cavi di alimentazione, del telefono e di segnale è  
pericolosa.  
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche:  
Non collegare o scollegare i cavi, non effettuare l'installazione, la manutenzione o  
la riconfigurazione di questo prodotto durante i temporali.  
Collegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione ad una presa elettrica correttamente cablata  
e munita di terra di sicurezza.  
Collegare qualsiasi apparecchiatura collegata a questo prodotto ad una presa  
elettrica correttamente cablata e munita di terra di sicurezza.  
Quando possibile, collegare o scollegare i cavi di segnale con una sola mano.  
Non accendere qualsiasi apparecchiatura in presenza di fuoco, acqua o se sono  
presenti danni all'apparecchiatura stessa.  
Scollegare i cavi di alimentazione, i sistemi di telecomunicazioni, le reti e i modem  
prima di aprire i coperchi delle unità, se non diversamente indicato nelle  
procedure di installazione e configurazione.  
Collegare e scollegare i cavi come descritto nella seguente tabella quando si  
effettuano l'installazione, la rimozione o l'apertura dei coperchi di questo  
prodotto o  
delle unità collegate.  
Per collegare:  
Per scollegare:  
1. SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.  
2. Collegare prima tutti i cavi alle unità.  
3. Collegare i cavi di segnale ai connettori.  
1. SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.  
2. Rimuovere prima i cavi di alimentazione  
dalle prese elettriche.  
3. Rimuovere i cavi di segnale dai  
connettori.  
4. Collegare i cavi di alimentazione alle  
prese elettriche.  
4. Rimuovere tutti i cavi dalle unità.  
5. ACCENDERE le unità.  
Avviso 2  
Related service information 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ATTENZIONE:  
Quando si sostituisce la batteria al litio, utilizzare solo una batteria IBM con numero  
parte 33F8354 o batterie dello stesso tipo o di tipo equivalente consigliate dal  
produttore. Se il sistema di cui si dispone è provvisto di un modulo contenente una  
batteria al litio, sostituire tale batteria solo con un tipo di modulo uguale a quello  
fornito dal produttore. La batteria contiene litio e può esplodere se utilizzata,  
maneggiata o smaltita impropriamente.  
Evitare di:  
Gettarla o immergerla in acqua  
Riscaldarla ad una temperatura superiore ai 100°C  
Cercare di ripararla o smontarla  
Smaltire secondo la normativa in vigore (D.Lgs 22 del 5/ 2/ 9) e successive  
disposizioni nazionali e locali.  
Avviso 3  
ATTENZIONE:  
Quando si installano prodotti laser come, ad esempio, le unità DVD, CD-ROM, a fibre  
ottiche o trasmettitori, prestare attenzione a quanto segue:  
Non rimuovere i coperchi. L'apertura dei coperchi di prodotti laser può  
determinare l'esposizione a radiazioni laser pericolose. All'interno delle unità non  
vi sono parti su cui effettuare l'assistenza tecnica.  
L'utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l'esecuzione di procedure non descritti nel  
presente manuale possono provocare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.  
PERICOLO  
Alcuni prodotti laser contengono all'interno un diodo laser di Classe 3A o Classe 3B.  
Prestare attenzione a quanto segue:  
Aprendo l'unità vengono emesse radiazioni laser. Non fissare il fascio, non guardarlo  
direttamente con strumenti ottici ed evitare l'esposizione diretta al fascio.  
Avviso 4  
206 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 kg  
ATTENZIONE:  
32 kg  
55 kg  
Durante il sollevamento della macchina seguire delle norme di sicurezza.  
Avviso 5  
ATTENZIONE:  
Il pulsante del controllo dell'alimentazione situato sull'unità e l'interruttore di  
alimentazione posto sull'alimentatore non disattiva la corrente elettrica fornita  
all'unità. L'unità potrebbe disporre di più di un cavo di alimentazione. Per disattivare  
la corrente elettrica dall'unità, accertarsi che tutti i cavi di alimentazione siano  
scollegati dalla sorgente di alimentazione.  
2
1
Avviso 10  
ATTENZIONE:  
Non poggiare oggetti che pesano più di 82 kg sulla parte superiore delle unità  
montate in rack.  
Related service information 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related service information 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Importante:  
Todas las declaraciones de precauciín de esta IBM documentation empiezan con un  
número. Dicho número se emplea para establecer una referencia cruzada de una  
declaraciín de precauciín o peligro en inglés con las versiones traducidas que de  
dichas declaraciones pueden encontrarse en esta secciín.  
Por ejemplo, si una declaraciín de peligro empieza con el número 1, las traducciones  
de esta declaraciín de precauciín aparecen en esta secciín bajo Declaraciín 1.  
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precauciín y peligro antes de llevar a cabo  
cualquier operaciín.  
Declaración 1  
PELIGRO  
La corriente eléctrica de los cables telefínicos, de alimentaciín y de comunicaciones es  
perjudicial.  
Para evitar una descarga eléctrica:  
No conecte ni desconecte ningún cable ni realice las operaciones de instalaciín,  
mantenimiento o reconfiguraciín de este producto durante una tormenta.  
Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a una toma de alimentaciín eléctrica con  
conexiín a tierra y cableado correctos.  
Conecte a tomas de alimentaciín con un cableado correcto cualquier equipo que  
vaya a estar conectado a este producto.  
Si es posible, utilice una sola mano cuando conecte o desconecte los cables de  
sent.al.  
No encienda nunca un equipo cuando haya riesgos de incendio, de inundaciín o  
de daños estructurales.  
Desconecte los cables de alimentaciín, sistemas de telecomunicaciones, redes y  
mídems conectados antes de abrir las cubiertas del dispositivo a menos que se  
indique lo contrario en los procedimientos de instalaciín y configuraciín.  
Conecte y desconecte los cables tal como se describe en la tabla siguiente cuando  
desee realizar una operaciín de instalaciín, de traslado o de apertura de las  
cubiertas para este producto o para los dispositivos conectados.  
Para la conexin  
1. APÁGUELO todo.  
2. En primer lugar, conecte los cables a los 2. En primer lugar, retire cada cable de  
Para la desconexiín  
1. APÁGUELO todo.  
dispositivos.  
alimentaciín de la toma de alimentaciín.  
3. Conecte los cables de señal a los  
conectores.  
3. Retire los cables de señal de los  
conectores.  
4. Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a la 4. Retire los cables de los dispositivos.  
toma de alimentaciín.  
5. ENCIENDA el dispositivo.  
Related service information 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaración 2  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
Cuando desee sustituir la batería de litio, utilice únicamente el número de pieza  
33F8354 de IBM o cualquier tipo de batería equivalente que recomiende el fabricante.  
Si el sistema tiene un mídulo que contiene una batería de litio, sustitúyalo únicamente  
por el mismo tipo de mídulo, que ha de estar creado por el mismo fabricante. La  
batería contiene litio y puede explotar si el usuario no la utiliza ni la maneja de forma  
adecuada o si no se desprende de la misma como corresponde.  
No realice las acciones siguientes:  
Arrojarla al agua o sumergirla  
Calentarla a una temperatura que supere los 100°C (212°F)  
Repararla o desmontarla  
Despréndase de la batería siguiendo los requisitos que exija el reglamento o la  
legislaciín local.  
Declaración 3  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
Cuando instale productos láser (como, por ejemplo, CD-ROM, unidades DVD,  
dispositivos de fibra íptica o transmisores), tenga en cuenta las advertencias  
siguientes:  
No retire las cubiertas. Si retira las cubiertas del producto láser, puede quedar  
expuesto a radiaciín láser perjudicial. Dentro del dispositivo no existe ninguna  
pieza que requiera mantenimiento.  
El uso de controles o ajustes o la realizaciín de procedimientos que no sean los que  
se han especificado aquí pueden dar como resultado una exposiciín perjudicial a  
las radiaciones.  
PELIGRO  
Algunos productos láser contienen un diodo de láser incorporado de Clase 3A o de  
Clase 3B. Tenga en cuenta la advertencia siguiente.  
Cuando se abre, hay radiaciín láser. No mire fijamente el rayo ni lleve a cabo ningún  
examen directamente con instrumentos ípticos; evite la exposiciín directa al rayo.  
Declaración 4  
212 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 kg (37 libras)  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
32 kg (70,5 libras)  
55 kg (121,2 libras)  
Tome medidas de seguridad al levantar el producto.  
Declaración 5  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
El botín de control de alimentaciín del dispositivo y el interruptor de alimentaciín de  
la fuente de alimentaciín no apagan la corriente eléctrica suministrada al dispositivo.  
Es posible también que el dispositivo tenga más de un cable de alimentaciín. Para  
eliminar la corriente eléctrica del dispositivo, asegúrese de desconectar todos los  
cables de alimentaciín de la fuente de alimentaciín.  
2
1
Declaración 10  
PRECAUCIÓN:  
No coloque ningún objeto que pese más de 82 kg (180 libras) encima de los  
dispositivos montados en bastidor.  
Related service information 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Send us your comments!  
We want to know your opinion about this manual (part number 24P2909). Your input  
will help us to improve our publications.  
Please photocopy this survey, complete it, and then fax it to IBM HMM Survey at  
919-543-8167 (USA).  
Name: _________________________________________  
Phone number: __________________________________  
1.  
Do you like this manual?  
Yes No  
________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________  
2.  
What would you like to see added, changed, or deleted in this manual?  
________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________  
3.  
4.  
What is your service experience level?  
Less than five years  
More than five years  
Which servers do you service most?  
________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________  
Thank you for your response!  
214 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem determination tips  
Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations that can be encountered,  
use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If possible,  
have this information available when requesting assistance from Service Support and  
Engineering functions.  
Machine type and model  
Processor or hard disk upgrades  
Failure symptom  
— Do diagnostics fail?  
— What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?  
— Is the failure repeatable?  
Has this configuration ever worked?  
— If it has been working, what changes were made prior to it failing?  
— Is this the original reported failure?  
Reference/ Diagnostics version  
— Type and version level  
Hardware configuration  
— Print (print screen) configuration currently in use  
— BIOS level  
Operating system software  
— Type and version level  
Note: To eliminate confusion, identical systems are considered identical only if they:  
1. Are the exact machine type and models  
2. Have the same BIOS level  
3. Have the same adapters/ attachments in the same locations  
4. Have the same address jumpers/ terminators/ cabling  
5. Have the same software versions and levels  
6. Have the same Reference/ Diagnostics Diskette (version)  
7. Have the same configuration options set in the system  
8. Have the same setup for the operation system control files  
Comparing the configuration and software set-up between "working and non-  
working" systems will often lead to problem resolution.  
Notices  
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply  
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any  
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that  
only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to IBM’s valid  
intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any functionally equivalent  
product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or  
Related service information 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other  
products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.  
IBM makes no representations or warranties regarding non-IBM products. For non-  
IBM software, third-party software licenses may apply.  
GHz, MHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed, not application  
performance. Many factors affect application performance.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB equals one bilion bytes. Total user-  
accessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.  
IBM makes no warranties, express or implied, regarding non-IBM products and  
services that are ServerProven, including but not limited to the implied warranties of  
merchantability and fitness for particular purpose. These products are offered and  
warranted solely by third parties.  
Trademarks  
The following items are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or  
other countries or both:  
IBM  
SystemXtra  
NetBAY  
ServeRAID  
ServerGuide  
Light Path Diagnostics  
Wake on LAN  
xSeries  
ThinkPad  
ServerProven  
Predictive Failure Analysis  
Alert on LAN  
TechConnect  
Active PCI  
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:  
Lotus and Lotus Notes are trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation.  
Intel, Pentium, MMX and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
UNIX is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
216 Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBM@  
Part Number:  
File Number:  
24P2909  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
24P2909  
0424P2909  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Water Pump 308652Y User Manual
Grundig Webcam BL 5040 User Manual
Haier Dishwasher DW12 EFMS User Manual
Hans Grohe Plumbing Product 04169XX0 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Dust Collector 98524 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Accessories XP10000 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Laptop 1100 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Switch GbE2 User Manual
Hunter Fan Fan 20431 User Manual
IBM Laptop 67P4579 User Manual